New Monarch Nice 3000 PDF

NICE3000new User Manual Preface
Preface
Thank you for purchasing the NICE3000new integrated elevator controller.

The NICE3000 new is a new-generation integrated elevator controller independently
developed by Suzhou MONARCH Control Technology Co., Ltd., by optimizing the NICE3000
controller based on a large number of applications and combining new industrial features.
The NICE3000new has the following advantages:
1. It supports high-performance vector control and open-loop low speed running. It can
drive both asynchronous motor and permanent magnetic synchronous motor (PMSM),
and implement switchover between the two types of motors easily by modifying only one
parameter.
2. It supports direct parallel connection of two elevators and supports the CANbus and
Modbus communication protocols for remote monitoring, which reduces the required
quantity of travling cables.
3. It supports a maximum of 40 floors and is widely applied to elevators used in the
residence, office buildings, shopping centers, and hospitals.
This manual describes the correct use of the NICE3000new, including product features,
safety information and precautions, installation, parameter setting, commissioning, and
maintenance & inspection. Read and understand the manual before using the product, and
keep it carefully for future maintenance.
The personnel who involve in system installation, commissioning, and maintenance must
receive necessary safety and use training, understand this manual thoroughly, and have
related experience before performing operations.
Notes
•• The drawings in the manual are sometimes shown without covers or protective guards.
Remember to install the covers or protective guards as specified first, and then perform
operations in accordance with the instructions.
•• The drawings in the manual are shown for description only and may not match the product
you purchased.
•• The instructions are subject to change, without notice, due to product upgrade, specification
modification as well as efforts to increase the accuracy and convenience of the manual.
•• Contact our agents or customer service center if you have some questions during the use.
-1-
Introduction NICE3000new User Manual
Introduction
1. Comparison with the NICE3000

The following table lists the comparison between the NICE3000new and the NICE3000.
Item NICE3000 NICE3000new

Maximum number of
31 (standard) 40 (standard)
floors
Maximum elevator
4 m/s 4 m/s
speed
24 inputs, 6 outputs, 3 high-voltage
I/O terminals 24 inputs, 6 outputs
inputs
CANbus 1 x CANbus 2 x CANbus
Modbus 1 x Modbus 1 x Modbus
Separate control for
Integrated control for synchronous and
Motor driving type synchronous and
asynchronous motors
asynchronous motors
Supporting:
•• Push-pull encoder
Supporting SIN/COS •• Open-collector incremental encoder
No-load-cell startup
encoder only •• UVW encoder
•• SIN/COS encoder
•• Endat encoder
•• Sensorless flux vector •• Sensorless flux vector control (SFVC)
control (SFVC)
Control mode •• Closed-loop vector control (CLVC)
•• Closed-loop vector
control (CLVC) •• V/F control
LCD operator Not support Support

Inside-car
Not support Support
commissioning
-2-
NICE3000new User Manual Introduction
2. Connection to peripheral devices
Three-phase AC Use within the allowable

power supply power supply specification
of the controller.
Select a proper breaker

Moulded case to resist large in-rush
circuit breaker current that flows into the
(MCCB) or earth controller at power-on.
leakage circuit
breaker (ELCB) To guarantee safety, use an
electromagnetic contactor. Do not
Electromagnetic use it to start or stop the controller
because such operation reduces
contactor the service life of the controller.
Suppress the high order

harmonic to improve the
AC input power factor. External operation
reactor panel
RUN LOCAL/REMOT FED/REV TUNE/TC
NICE3000new
Hz A V
RPM %
PRG ENTER
Noise filter on integrated elevator QUICK
controller
STOP
RUN MF.K
input side
RES
Reduce the
electromagnetic
interference on
the input side.
Ground
Ground
Reliably ground the
motor and the
controller to prevent Output
electric shock. reactor
Braking unit
Braking resistor +
BR -
Motor
P(+)
Ground
•• Do not install the capacitor or surge suppressor on the output side of the controller.
Otherwise, it may cause faults to the controller or damage to the capacitor and surge
suppressor.
•• Inputs/Outputs (main circuit) of the controller contain harmonics, which may interfere
with the communication device connected to the controller. Therefore, install an anti-
interference filter to minimize the interference.
•• For more details on peripheral devices, refer to related selection guidelines.
-3-
3. Function list of the NICE3000new
Common Running Functions

In automatic running or attendant state, this function enables the
Full collective elevator to respond both car calls and hall calls. Passengers at any
selective service floor can call the elevator by pressing the up call button and
down call button.
The system automatically determines different door open time for door
Door open holding
open for call, command, protection, or delay according to the set door
time setting
open holding time.
In automatic running state, passengers can press the door open button
Door open holding
in the car to delay door open to facilitate goods to be moved in/out.
Door machine
You can set the required service floors of the door machines.
service floor setting
Door pre-close During door open holding in automatic running state, passengers
by the door close can press the door close button to close the door in advance, which
button improves the efficiency.
The system supports display of floor numbers in combinations
Floor number
of numbers and letters, which meets the requirements of special
display setting
conditions.
If the door is blocked by stuff during door close, the light curtain
Light curtain signal
acts and the elevator opens the door. This function is invalid in fire
judgment
emergency state.
Auxiliary operation An optional auxiliary operation box that has the same functions as the
box main operation box is available.
Independent control
When there are two doors for a car, automatic control on the two doors
of the front door
depends on your requirements.
and back door
If the door lock is not applied after the elevator performs door close
Repeat door close for a certain time, the elevator automatically opens the door and then
closes the door again.
When the main and auxiliary operation boxes are configured, they can
Independent
independently control door open/close according to the commands in
command
automatic running state.
Voice The elevator automatically announces information such as the running
announcement direction and next arriving floor during running.
The systems implements automatic accurate leveling based on the
Auto-leveling
floor pulse counting and up/down leveling feedback signals.
Response at The system allows the elevator to automatically respond to calls from
acceleration the service floors during acceleration.
Down collective In automatic running or attendant state, the elevator responds only to
selective control hall down calls besides car calls.
Idle elevator In automatic running state, the elevator automatically returns to the set
returning to base parking floor and waits for passengers if there is no car call or hall call
floor within the set time.
-4-
If the door open time exceeds the door open protection time but the
Landing at another door open limit signal is still inactive, the elevator closes the door and
floor then automatically runs to the next landing floor. The system reports
fault Err55.
When the door fails to close within the set time due to the action of the
Forced door close light curtain or safety edge, the elevator enters the forced door close
state, closes the door slowly, and gives a prompt tone.
Cancellation of Passengers can press the button consecutively twice to cancel wrong
wrong calls calls.
You can enable or disable the system service for certain floors flexibly
Service floor setting
based on actual requirements.
Time-based floor You can flexibly set the time periods and corresponding service floors
service or select the service floors by using the service floor switchover switch.
The elevator does not respond to any call, and the door needs to
Independent
be closed manually. In the case of group control, the elevator runs
running
independently out of the group control system.
In attendant state, the running of the elevator is controlled by the
Attendant running
attendant.
When the elevator is in non-inspection state and stops at non-leveling
Low-speed self-
area, the elevator automatically runs to the leveling area at low speed if
rescue
the safety requirements are met, and then opens the door.
Door control You can set whether the system keeps outputting commands after door
function open limit and door close limit based on the type of the door machine.
After the elevator arrives at the destination floor, the CTB gives a
Car arrival gong
prompt tone.
Hall arrival forecast When the elevator will arrive at the destination floor soon, the hall
indicator arrival forecast indicator becomes ON.
After the elevator will arrive at the destination floor soon, the system
Hall arrival gong
outputs the hall arrival gong.
Hall I/O extension If the hall I/O terminals are not sufficient, more terminals can be
function provided by using an HCB-B board.
Car I/O extension If the car I/O terminals are not sufficient, more terminals can be
function provided by using an HCB-B board.
The system can automatically identify whether a hall call button is stuck
Button stuck check and cancel the stuck call, preventing the condition that the elevator
cannot close and run due to stuck hall calls.
Automatic The system automatically implements startup torque compensation
startup torque based on the current car load, achieving smooth startup and improving
compensation the riding comfort.
The system automatically calculates and generates the running curves
Direct stop based on the distance, enabling the elevator to directly stop at the
leveling position without creeping.
Automatic The system automatically calculates the optimum speed curve
generation of compliant with the human-machine function principle based on the
optimum curve distance, without being limited by the number of curves or short floor.
-5-
Service suspension When the elevator cannot respond to hall calls, the corresponding
output terminal outputs the service suspension signal.
Running times In automatic running state, the system automatically records the
recording running times of the elevator.
Running time The system automatically records the accumulative power-on time,
recording working hours, and working days of the elevator.
Automatic door If the system detects that the door lock circuit is abnormal during door
open upon door open/close, the elevator automatically opens and closes the door again,
lock abnormality and reports a fault after the set door open/close times is reached.
The elevator first directly runs to the VIP floor and provides services for
VIP service
special persons.
Specified elevator The specified elevator is preferred to respond to calls of specified
preferred floors.
When the elevator is waiting at the leveling position, if there is a call at
Disability service this floor from the disability operation box, the door open holding time is
prolonged. It is the same for the back door.
When the car is full-loaded in automatic running state, the elevator
does not respond to hall calls from the passing floors. These halls calls,
Full-load direct
however, can still be registered, and will be executed at next time of
running
running (in the case of single elevator) or by another elevator (in the
case of group control).
When the car load exceeds the rated elevator load, the elevator alarms
Overload protection
and stops running.
The system automatically records detailed information of faults, which
Fault data recording
helps improve the efficiency of maintenance and repair.
Inspection-related Functions
Simple
The 3-button keypad on the MCB provides the functions such as
maintenance
commissioning the running floors and door open/close.
keypad
Operation box The LCD operator can be connected to the system in the car for
commissioning elevator commissioning, which improves the commissioning efficiency.
Shaft auto-tuning is required before first-time automatic running. During
shaft auto-tuning, the elevator runs from the bottom floor to the top floor
Shaft auto-tuning
at the inspection speed and automatically records all position signals in
the shaft.
User-defined You can view the parameters that are modified and different from the
parameter display default setting.
After entering the inspection state, the system cancels automatic
Inspection running running and related operations. You can press the up or down call
button to make the elevator jog at the inspection speed.
With simple parameter setting, the system can obtain the motor
Motor auto-tuning
parameters no matter whether the motor is with-load or without load.
Every time the elevator runs to the terminal floor, the system
Floor position automatically checks and corrects the car position information based on
intelligent correction slow-down switch 1, and eliminates over travel top terminal or bottom
terminal with use of the slow-down switches.
-6-
Considering inaccurate running control at high inspection speed but

Dual-speed for a long running time at low inspection speed, the system provides the
inspection dual-speed curve for inspection, which greatly improves the efficiency
at inspection.
The test running includes the fatigue test of a new elevator, car call
floor test, hall call test, and tests such as hall call response forbidden,
Test running
door open/close forbidden, terminal floor limit switch shielded, and
overload signal shielded.
Fire Emergency and Security Functions
Returning to
After receiving a fire emergency signal, the elevator does not respond
base floor at fire
to any call but directly runs to the fire emergency floor and waits.
emergency
After the elevator enters the firefighter running mode, door open/close
is implemented by the jog operation (optional) by using the door open
Firefighter running
and close buttons rather than automatically. In addition, the elevator
responds to only car calls and only one call can be registered once.
After the security floor function is enabled, the security floor is used at
10:00 p.m. to 6:00 a.m, and the elevator runs to the security floor first
Security floor
every time, stops and opens the door, and then runs to the destination
floor.
In automatic running state, when the elevator lock switch acts or the
set elevator time is reached, the elevator cancels all registered calls,
Elevator lock
returns to the elevator lock floor, stops running, and turns off the lamp
and fan in the car.
Troubleshooting Faults are classified into different levels based on the severity. Different
based on fault level levels of faults are rectified using different methods.
The system detects the running state of the elevator in real time. If the
Runaway
elevator speed exceeds the limit, the system immediately stops running
prevention
of the elevator.
Automatic The system automatically identifies power failure and outputs the relay
identification of signal for emergency evacuation automatic switchover to implement
power failure emergency evacuation at power failure.
For the synchronous motor, when the power supply is interrupted, the
system can perform automatic switchover between shorting stator
braking mode and controller drive mode, implementing quick and stable
Automatic running self-rescue.
mode switchover at
power failure Shorting stator braking mode: Upon power failure, UPS is used, the
motor stator is shorted, and the brake is automatically released, making
the car move slowly under the effect of the weighing difference between
the car and the counterweight.
Running direction
When the power supply is interrupted, the system can automatically
self-identification at
identify the current car load and determine the running direction.
power failure
After detecting a position abnormality, the system runs the elevator to
Base floor
each floor until reaching the terminal floor for verification, guaranteeing
verification
system security.
-7-
The system automatically determines the fault level. If the safety

Passenger
running conditions are met, the elevator first runs to the leveling
unloading
position to unload passengers.
Interference degree
The system judges the degree of interference on the communication.
judgment
When the earthquake detection device acts and inputs a signal to the
Earthquake system, the elevator lands at the nearest floor and stops running. After
protection the earthquake signal becomes inactive and the fault is reset manually,
the elevator restores to normal running.
For the PMSM, after the elevator decelerates to stop, the holding
Current cancellation
current of the motor is cancelled in ramp mode, preventing abnormal
in ramp mode
noise during current cancellation.
Independent The NICE3000new system supports not only three-phase 380 VAC but
working power also single-phase 220 VAC to meet different applications of the power
supply supply system (such as 220 V UPS)
The system detects the bus voltage and automatically adjusts the
Automatic voltage
running speed of the elevator to adapt to the situation of insufficient
identification
power from power supply (such as emergency UPS).
Parallel/Group Control and Other Functions
The system supports parallel control of two elevators and provides
Parallel control multiple scheduling algorithms to meet requirements of different
customers.
Dispersed waiting In parallel control, the elevators can wait at different floors.
If the parallel/group control exit switch of a certain elevator in a parallel/
group control system is valid or the time for exiting the parallel/group
Parallel/Group
control is reached, the elevator exits parallel/group control and runs
control exit
independently. This does not affect normal running of the parallel/group
control system.
If an elevator in the parallel/group control system cannot respond to
Parallel/Group
calls in time due to faults, the elevator automatically exits the parallel/
control automatic
group control system and runs independently. This does not affect
exit
normal running of the parallel/group control system.
The system automatically judges the number of passengers in the
car and compares it with the number of registered car calls. If there
Anti-nuisance
are excessive car calls, the system determines that it is nuisance and
function
cancels all car calls. In this case, passengers need to register correct
car calls again.
Prompt of non-door The system gives a prompt when the elevator stops at a non-door zone
zone stop area due to faults.
When the elevator is full-loaded, a full-load indication is displayed on
Full-load indication
the HCBs and the elevator directly runs to the desired floors.
Interface for
The system provides an interface for intelligent residential management
intelligent
to perform remote monitoring on the state of elevators in the residential
residential
district.
management
You can conveniently upload and download parameters of the system
Parameter copy
by using the LCD operator.
-8-
Energy-saving Functions
If there is no running command within the set time, the system
Car energy-saving
automatically cuts off the power supply to the lamp and fan in the car.
Energy-saving
When the normal power supply is interrupted and the emergency power
running with
supply is used, the system reduces the running speed of the elevator in
standby power
the prerequisite of guaranteeing the smooth running curve.
supply
Arrival gong
Within the set time period, the arrival gong is disabled.
disabled at night
After the car lamp is turned off, the system does not output the door
Energy-saving of
close command, which reduces power consumption of the door
idle door machine
machine.
4. Optional functions
Function Description Remark
After landing at a floor, the elevator may move

upward or downward due to the load change and
the car door is not aligned with the ground, which
MCTC-SCB
Micro-leveling is inconvenient for in and out of passengers and
required
goods. In this case, the system allows the elevator
to run to the leveling position in the door open state
at the leveling speed.
Power failure For the elevator configured with UPS, the system
emergency uses the UPS to implement low-speed self-rescue in UPS required
evacuation the case of power failure.
NEMS
Onsite The system can control and monitor running of
software
commissioning elevators by using the NEMS software.
required
The control system can be connected to the
NEMS and
Residential terminal in the monitoring room. By using the NEMS
accessories
monitoring software, you can view the floor position, running
required
direction, and fault state of the elevator.
The control system can be connected to the terminal
(such as PC) in the monitoring room. By using the MCTC-MIB
Remote monitoring
NEMS software, you can view the floor position, required
running direction, and fault state of the elevator.
During normal stop, when the elevator speed is
smaller than 0.2 m/s and the door zone signal is
active, the system shorts the door lock by means of MCTC-SCB
Door pre-open
the shorting door lock circuit contactor and outputs required
the door open signal, implementing door pre-open.
This improves the elevator use efficiency.
Passengers can use an IC card to go to floors that IC card
IC card
require authorization. required
Operation In case of an incorrect setting, you can restore to LCD operator
restoration parameters of the last operation state. required
-9-
Contents
Preface................................................................................................................. 1
Introduction........................................................................................................... 2
Chapter 1 Safety Information and Precautions.................................................. 14
1.1 Safety Precautions....................................................................................................... 14
1.2 General Precautions..................................................................................................... 17
1.3 Protective Functions..................................................................................................... 19
Chapter 2 Product Information........................................................................... 22

2.1 System Configuration of the NICE3000new.............................................................22
2.2 Designation Rules and Model Description................................................................... 23
2.3 Models and Specifications............................................................................................ 24
2.4 Technical Specifications............................................................................................... 25
2.5 Physical Appearance and Mounting Dimensions......................................................... 27
2.6 Optional Parts............................................................................................................... 29
2.7 Selection of Braking Resistor....................................................................................... 30
Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation................................................ 34

3.1 NICE3000new Integrated Elevator Controller................................................................. 34
3.2 CTB Board (MCTC-CTB).............................................................................................. 40
3.3 Display Board (MCTC-HCB)........................................................................................ 43
3.4 CCB Board (MCTC-CCB)............................................................................................. 53
3.5 Selection and Use of the MCTC-PG Card.................................................................... 56
3.6 Selection of Peripheral Electrical Devices.................................................................... 59
3.7 Electrical Wiring Diagram of the NICE3000new Control System.................................... 60
3.8 Installation of Shaft Position Signals............................................................................ 60
Chapter 4 Use of the NICE3000new..................................................................... 66

4.1 Use of the Onboard Keypad......................................................................................... 66
4.2 Use of the LED Operation Panel.................................................................................. 70
4.3 Use of the LCD Operator.............................................................................................. 73
Chapter 5 System Commissioning and Application Example............................. 78

5.1 System Commissioning................................................................................................ 78
5.2 System Application....................................................................................................... 89
Chapter 6 Function Code Table........................................................................ 104
6.1 Function Code Description......................................................................................... 104
6.2 Function Code Groups............................................................................................... 104
6.3 Function Code Table................................................................................................... 105
Chapter 7 Description of Function Codes........................................................ 136

Group F0: Basic Parameters............................................................................................ 136
Group F1: Motor Parameter............................................................................................. 138
Group F2: Vector Control Parameters.............................................................................. 141
Group F3: Running Control Parameters........................................................................... 144
Group F4: Floor Parameters............................................................................................ 147
Group F5: Terminal Function Parameters........................................................................ 148
Group F6: Basic Elevator Parameters.............................................................................. 159
Group F7: Test Function Parameters............................................................................... 171
Group F8: Enhanced Function Parameters...................................................................... 173
Group F9: Time Parameters............................................................................................. 176
Group FA: Keypad Setting Parameters............................................................................ 177
Group Fb: Door Function Parameter................................................................................ 188
Group FC: Protection Function Parameters..................................................................... 190
Group Fd: Communication Parameters............................................................................ 194
Group FE: Elevator Function Parameters........................................................................ 196
Group Fr: Leveling Adjustment Parameters..................................................................... 200
Group FF: Factory Parameters........................................................................................ 201
Group FP: User Parameters............................................................................................. 201
Chapter 8 EMC................................................................................................. 204

8.1 Definition of Terms...................................................................................................... 204
8.2 Introduction to EMC Standard.................................................................................... 204
8.3 Selection of Peripheral EMC Devices........................................................................ 205
8.4 Shielded Cable........................................................................................................... 208
8.5 Solutions to Common EMC Interference Problems.................................................... 211
Chapter 9 Troubleshooting............................................................................... 214

9.1 Description of Fault Levels......................................................................................... 214
9.2 Fault Information and Troubleshooting....................................................................... 215
1
Safety Information and Precautions
Safety Information and Precautions NICE3000new User Manual
Chapter 1 Safety Information and Precautions
In this manual, the notices are graded based on the degree of danger:
•• DANGER indicates that failure to comply with the notice will result in severe
personal injury or even death.
•• WARNING indicates that failure to comply with the notice will result in potential
risk of severe personal injury or even death.
•• CAUTION indicates that failure to comply with the notice will result in minor or
moderate personal injury or equipment damage.
In addition, NOTE appearing in other chapters indicates that an unintended result or

situation may occur if the notice is not complied with.
The notices in this manual you have to observe are aimed at guaranteeing your personal
safety, as well as to prevent damage to the controller or the parts connected to it. Read this
manual carefully so that you have a thorough understanding and perform all operations by
following the notices in this chapter. Monarch will assume no liability or responsibility for any
injury or loss caused by improper operation.
1.1 Safety Precautions

Safety
Use Stage Precautions
Grade
•• This controller has hazardous high voltage and the controlled
motor is a dangerous rotating device. Failure to comply with
the notices may result in personal injury or damage to the
property.
•• Transportation, installation, operation and maintenance of
the controller can be performed only by qualified personnel
after they get familiar with the safety information in this
Warning WARNING
manual. This is the prerequisite of safe and stable running of
the equipment.
•• Do not open the front cover or touch the power terminals
on the main circuit within 10 minutes after the controller is
powered off. The capacitor on the DC circuit still has residual
high voltage even after power-off. Failure to comply will
result in electric shock.
- 14 -
NICE3000new User Manual Safety Information and Precautions
Safety
Grade
•• Do not install the equipment if you find water seepage,
component missing or damage upon unpacking.
•• Do not install the equipment if the packing list does not
DANGER conform to the product you received.
•• Install the equipment on incombustible objects such as
metal, and keep it away from combustible materials. Failure
to comply may result in a fire.
•• Do not loosen the fixed screws of the components, especially
the screws with red mark.
WARNING •• Do not install the controller on vibrating parts. Failure
During to comply may result in damage to the equipment or
Installation unexpected accidents.
•• Handle the equipment with care during transportation to
prevent damage to the equipment.
•• Do not drop wire end or screw into the controller. Failure to
comply will result in damage to the controller.
•• Do not use the equipment with damaged or missing
CAUTION
components. Failure to comply will result in personal injury.
•• Do not touch the components with your hands. Failure to
comply will result in static electricity damage.
•• Install the controller in places free of vibration and direct
sunlight.
•• Wiring must be performed only by qualified personnel under
instructions described in this manual. Failure to comply may
result in unexpected accidents.
•• A circuit breaker must be used to isolate the power supply
DANGER and the controller. Failure to comply may result in a fire.
•• Ensure that the power supply is cut off before wiring. Failure
to comply may result in electric shock.
•• Tie the controller to ground properly by standard. Failure to
comply may result in electric shock.
•• Never connect the power cables to the output terminals (U,
V, W) of the controller. Pay attention to the marks of the
At Wiring wiring terminals and ensure correct wiring. Failure to comply
WARNING will result in damage to the controller.
•• Never connect the braking resistor between the DC bus
terminals (+) and (-). Failure to comply may result in a fire.
•• Ensure that the cabling satisfies the EMC requirements and
the regional safety standard. Use wire sizes recommended
in the manual. Failure to comply may result in accidents.
•• Use a shielded cable for the encoder, and ensure that the
CAUTION
shield is reliably grounded at one end.
•• Use a twisted cable with twisted distance of 20−30 mm
as the communication cable, and ensure that the shield is
reliably grounded.
- 15 -
Safety
Grade
•• All peripheral devices must be connected properly according
to the circuit wiring instructions provided in this manual.
Failure to comply will result in accidents
•• Cover the controller properly before power-on to prevent
electric shock.
•• Do not open the controller’s cover after power-on. Failure to
comply may result in electric shock.
•• Do not touch the controller and peripheral circuits with wet
hand. Failure to comply may result in electric shock.
•• Do not touch any I/O terminal of the controller. Failure to
DANGER comply may result in electric shock.
•• The controller performs safety detection on external strong
power circuits automatically at the beginning of power-on.
Do not touch the U, V, W terminals of the controller or the
motor terminals at the moment. Failure to comply may result
in electric shock.
•• Do not touch the fan or the discharging resistor to check the
temperature. Failure to comply will result in personal burnt.
•• Signal detection must be performed only by qualified
personnel during operation. Failure to comply will result in
personal injury or damage to the controller.
•• Do not touch the rotating part of the motor during the motor
auto-tuning or running. Failure to comply will result in
During
accidents.
running
•• Check that the following requirements are met:
•• The voltage class of the power supply is consistent with the
rated voltage class of the controller.
WARNING
•• The input terminals (R, S, T) and output terminals (U, V, W)
are properly connected.
•• No short-circuit exists in the peripheral circuit.
•• The wiring is secured.
Failure to comply will result in damage to the controller.
•• For synchronous motor, ensure that motor auto-tuning is
performed successfully. Perform trial running before resuming
the steel rope so as to make the motor run properly.
•• Avoid objects falling into the controller when it is running.
Failure to comply will result in damage to the controller.
•• Do not perform the voltage resistance test on any part of the
controller because such test has been done in the factory.
CAUTION
Failure to comply will result in accidents.
•• Do not change the default settings of the controller. Failure
to comply will result in damage to the controller.
•• Do not start/stop the controller by opening or closing the
contactor. Failure to comply will result in damage to the
controller. Failure to comply will result in damage to the
controller.
- 16 -
Safety
Grade
•• Do not repair or maintain the controller at power-on. Failure
to comply will result in electric shock.
•• Repair or maintain the controller when its voltage is lower
than 36 VAC, about two minutes after the controller is
DANGER powered off. Otherwise, the residual voltage in the capacitor
may result in personal injury.
•• Do not allow unqualified personnel to repair or maintain the
controller. Failure to comply will result in personal injury or
damage to the controller.
•• Repair or maintenance of the controller may be performed
During
only by the center authorized by Monarch or qualified
maintenance
personnel. Failure to comply will result in personal injury or
WARNING damage to the controller.
•• Power supply must be cut off before repair or maintenance
of the controller.
•• Set the parameters again after the controller is replaced. All
the pluggable components must be plugged or removed only
after power-off.
CAUTION
•• Strictly obey the laws and regulations and repair and
maintain the elevator equipment periodically. Only timely
troubleshooting can ensure the safety of passengers.
The packaging materials, screws and terminal blocks can be
CAUTION re-used and it is suggested that you keep them well for future
use.
Disposal The electrolytic capacitors on the main circuits and PCB may
explode when they are burnt. Poisonous gas is generated when
WARNING
the plastic parts are burnt. Treat them as ordinary industrial
waste.
1.2 General Precautions

1. Motor insulation test
Perform the insulation test when the motor is used for the first time, or when it is reused
after being stored for a long time, or in a regular check-up, in order to prevent the poor
insulation of motor windings from damaging the controller. The motor must be disconnected
from the controller during the insulation test. A 500-V mega-Ohm meter is recommended for
the test. Ensure that the insulation resistance is not less than 5 MΩ.
2. Thermal protection of the motor
If the rated capacity of the motor selected does not match that of the controller, especially
when the rated power of the controller is greater than that of the motor, adjust the motor
protection parameters on the operation panel of the controller or install a thermal relay for
the motor circuit for protection.
- 17 -
3. Motor heat and noise

The output of the controller is pulse width modulation (PWM) wave with certain harmonic
wave, and therefore, the motor temperature rise, noise, and vibration are slightly greater
than those at running with the power frequency (50 Hz).
4. Voltage-sensitive device or capacitor on the output side of the controller
The controller outputs PWM waves, and therefore, do not install the capacitor for improving
power factor or lightning protection voltage-sensitive resistor on the output side of the
controller. Otherwise, the controller may suffer transient overcurrent or even be damaged.
5. Contactor on the input and output sides of the controller
When a contactor is installed between the input side of the controller and the power supply,
the controller must not be started or stopped by opening or closing the contactor. When a
contactor is installed between the output side of the controller and the motor, do not open or
close the contactor when the controller has output. Otherwise, modules inside the controller
may be damaged.
6. Use outside the rated voltage
The controller must not be used outside the allowable voltage range specified in this
manual. Otherwise, components inside the controller may be damaged. If required, use a
corresponding voltage step-up or step-down device.
7. Surge suppressor
The controller has a built-in voltage dependent resistor (VDR) for suppressing the surge
voltage generated when the inductive loads (electromagnetic contactor, electromagnetic
relay, solenoid valve, electromagnetic coil and electromagnetic brake) around the controller
are switched on or off. If the inductive loads generate very high surge voltage, use a surge
suppressor for the inductive load or also use a diode.
Note
Do not connect the surge suppressor on the output side of the controller.
8. Altitude and de-rating

In places where the altitude is above 1000 m and the cooling effect reduces due to thin air, it
is necessary to de-rate the controller. Contact Monarch for technical support.
9. Adaptable motor
The controller is adaptable to squirrel-cage asynchronous motor or AC PMSM. Select a
proper controller according to motor nameplate.
The default parameters configured inside the controller are squirrel-cage asynchronous
motor parameters. It is still necessary to perform motor auto-tuning or modify the default
values based on actual conditions. Otherwise, the running effect and protection performance
will be affected. For PMSM, motor auto-tuning must be performed.
10. Precautions on selecting residual-current circuit breaker (RCCB)
Tripping may be caused if an improper RCCB is selected when the controller drives the
motor. This is because the output wave of the controller has high harmonics and the motor
- 18 -
cable and the cable connecting the controller and the motor produce leakage current, which
is much larger than the current when the motor runs at power frequency (50 Hz).
Thus, it is necessary to determine the proper RCCB sensitivity based on the general
leakage current of the cables and the motor. The leakage current is dependent on the motor
capacity, cable length, insulation class and wiring method. Generally, the leakage current on
the output side of the controller is three times of the current when the motor runs at power
frequency (50 Hz).
1.3 Protective Functions

Adopting different protective functions for different levels of faults, the NICE3000new provides
the elevator running system with full abnormality protection. For detailed solutions to the
faults, see chapter 8.
Faults of the controller are classified as follows:
1. Speed abnormal
The controller monitors the encoder feedback speed and output torque. Once the
feedback speed exceeds the limit or the deviation between the torque limit and the
speed feedback is too large, the controller performs protection immediately, reports an
alarm and prohibits running.
2. Drive control abnormal
The related faults include drive overcurrent, overvoltage/undervoltage, power input/
output phase loss, overload, and storage abnormality. If such a fault occurs, the
controller performs protection immediately, stops output, applies the brake and prohibits
running.
3. Encoder abnormal
The related faults include encoder phase loss, direction reversing, wire-breaking, and
pulse interference. If such a fault occurs, the controller performs protection immediately
to avoid unexpected accidents. If pulse interference is large, the controller reports
an alarm immediately. If pulse interference is small, the controller performs position
correction every time it receives a leveling signal and clears the accumulative error.
4. Leveling sensor abnormal
The related faults include sensor failure or sensor stuck. The controller judges whether a
fault occurs based on the leveling signal change. If the leveling signal does not change
within the set time, the system reports an alarm.
5. Floor data abnormal
The system stores the floor information through the shaft auto-tuning. If the floor data
is abnormal, the system prompts the fault information at the first-time running. During
actual running, the controller continuously compares position information input by DIs
with the stored floor data. If the deviation is large, the system reports an alarm.
- 19 -
- 20 -
2
Product Information
Product Information NICE3000new User Manual
Chapter 2 Product Information
2.1 System Configuration of the NICE3000new

The NICE3000new series integrated elevator control system combines the functions of
both elevator controller and the high-performance vector controller. It mainly includes the
integrated elevator controller, car top board (MCTC-CTB), hall call board (MCTC-HCB),
car call board (MCTC-CCB), and optional door pre-open module, and remote monitoring
system.
The following figure shows the system components.
Figure 2-1 System components of the NICE3000new
NICE3000new integrated controller
LED operation panel Synchronous or

(MDKE) or LCD asynchronous motor
operator (MDKE3)
Host
computer
MCTC-CTB
CANbus
Communication
in parallel mode
Modbus
CANbus
MCTC-HCB
Load cell MCTC-HCB MCTC-CCB

MCTC-HCB
1. It controls the motor based on feedback signals from the encoder, and records
information of all position switches in the shaft by pulse, implementing accurate leveling
and direct travel ride and guaranteeing running safety.
2. It implements information collection and control of car-related components by means of
CANbus communication with the MCTC-CTB.
3. It registers and displays hall calls of all floors with easy address setting by means of
Modbus communication with the MCTC-HCB.
- 22 -
NICE3000new User Manual Product Information
The following figure shows the system structure of the NICE3000new.

Figure 2-2 System structure of the NICE3000new
Modbus
MCTC-HCB
Braking CANbus
MCTC-CTB
unit
MCTC-CCB
Input power
Control
Encoder feedback Modbus
circuit of
Encoder U Drive circuit the MCTC-HCB
Motor M V of the motor controller
W
MCTC-HCB
Power supply
circuit
NICE3000new integrated MCTC-HCB
controller
2.2 Designation Rules and Model Description

Figure 2-3 Designation rules and nameplate of the NICE3000new
NICE–L–C–40 15
NICE series integrated Mark Power Class
elevator controller
02 2.2 kW
Mark Controller Type 03 3.7 kW
Specialized for
L elevators ... ...
Mark Motor Type 30 30 kW
A Asynchronous motor 45 45 kW
Mark Voltage Class
NICE3000new B Synchronous motor
integrated Single-phase/
Synchronous 20 Three-phase 220 V
elevator C /Asynchronous motor
controller integrator 40 Three-phase 380 V
Nameplate
position
Rating namplate
Controller model MODEL: NICE-L-C-4015

Power class POWER: 15kW
Rated input INPUT: 3PH AC380V 36A 50/60Hz
Rated output OUTPUT: 3PH AC 0~380V 33A 0~90Hz
Manufacturing SN S/N: 010150602803825403
Suzhou MONARCH Control Technology Co.Ltd
Note that the NICE3000new has multiple voltage classes and power classes. For details, see
the Table 2-1.
- 23 -
2.3 Models and Specifications

Table 2-1 NICE3000new models and specifications
Power Input Current Output Current Motor Power

Controller Model
Capacity (kVA) (A) (A) (kW)
Single-phase 220 V, range: 200−240 V
NICE-L-C-2002 2.3 13.2 5.2 1.1
NICE-L-C-2003 3.4 17 7.5 1.5
220-NICE-L-C-4007 9.8 29 10.3 2.2
220-NICE-L-C-4011 12.1 36 15.5 3.7
220-NICE-L-C-4015 13.9 41 19 4.0
220-NICE-L-C-4018 17.3 40 22.5 5.5
220-NICE-L-C-4022 23.1 49 27.7 11
220-NICE-L-C-4030 33 61 34.6 15
Three-phase 220 V, range: 200−240 V
NICE-L-C-2002 4.0 11.0 9.6 2.2
NICE-L-C-2003 5.9 17.0 14.0 3.7
220-NICE-L-C-4007 17.0 29.0 18.0 4.0
220-NICE-L-C-4011 21.0 36.0 27.0 5.5
220-NICE-L-C-4015 24.0 41.0 33.0 7.5
220-NICE-L-C-4018 30.0 40.0 39.0 11.0
220-NICE-L-C-4022 40.0 49.0 48.0 15.0
220-NICE-L-C-4030 57.0 61.0 60.0 18.5
NICE-L-C-4002 4.0 6.5 5.1 2.2
NICE-L-C-4003 5.9 10.5 9.0 3.7
NICE-L-C-4005 8.9 14.8 13.0 5.5
NICE-L-C-4007 11.0 20.5 18.0 7.5
NICE-L-C-4011 17.0 29.0 27.0 11.0
NICE-L-C-4015 21.0 36.0 33.0 15.0
NICE-L-C-4018 24.0 41.0 39.0 18.5
NICE-L-C-4022 30.0 49.5 48.0 22.0
NICE-L-C-4030 40.0 62.0 60.0 30.0
NICE-L-C-4037 57.0 77.0 75.0 37.0
NICE-L-C-4045 69.0 93.0 91.0 45.0
NICE-L-C-4055 85 113 112 55
- 24 -
Note
1. In terms of single-phase and three-phase 220 VAC, NICE-L-A/B-2002 and NICE-L-A/B-2003

are specially designed for 220 VAC. The other models that are marked by prefixing "220-" are
modified from the three-phase 380 VAC models.
2. Same models are available for single-phase 220 VAC and three-phase 220 VAC. Pay attentions
to the power class of the adaptable motor during the use.
3. Select the proper controller output current based on the rated motor current. Ensure that the
controller output current is equal to or greater than the rated motor current.
4. If you require high voltage or power class, contact Monarch.
2.4 Technical Specifications

Table 2-2 Technical specifications of the NICE3000new
Item Specification
Maximum frequency 300 Hz
2–16 kHz, adjusted automatically based on the load
Carrier frequency
features
Sensorless flux vector control (SFVC)
Motor control mode Closed-loop vector control (CLVC)
Voltage/Frequency (V/F) control
0.5 Hz: 180% (SFVC)
Startup torque
0 Hz: 200% (CLVC)
Speed stability
±0.5% (SFVC) ±0.05% (CLVC)
accuracy
Torque control
±5% (CLVC)
accuracy
60s for 150% of the rated current, 1s for 200% of the
Overload
Basic rated current
specifications Motor auto-tuning With-load auto-tuning; no-load auto-tuning
Direct travel ride mode in which the leveling position
Distance control
can be adjusted flexibly
Acceleration/
N curves generated automatically
Deceleration curve
New reliable slow-down function, automatically
Slow-down
identifying the position of the slow-down shelf
32-bit data, recording the position in the shaft
Shaft auto-tuning
accurately
Leveling adjustment Flexible and easy leveling adjustment function
Startup torque Load cell startup pre-torque compensation
compensation No-load-cell startup pre-torque self-adaption
Real-time clock for time-based floor service, peak
Real-time clock
service and automatic password
- 25 -
Item Specification
Easy to implement multiple elevators commissioning
Test function
functions.
Fault protection Solutions to different levels of elevator faults
Intelligent Remote monitoring, user management, and group
Basic management control adjustment
specifications
Security check of
Security check of peripheral devices, such as
peripheral devices
grounding and short circuit, after power-on
after power-on
Monitoring the state of feedback signals to ensure
Status monitor
that the elevator works properly
24 x DI
Input specification: 24 V, 5 mA
Digital input (DI) 3 heavy-current detection input terminals of safety
circuit and door lock circuit
Input specification: 95−125 V
Analog input (AI) AI (voltage range: –10 V to +10 V)
I/O feature 2 CANbus communication ports
Communication port
1 Modbus communication port
6 relay outputs
Output terminal
block The terminals can be allocated with different
functions.
Supporting different encoders by using an optional
Encoder interface
PG card
LED operation 5-digit LED display, querying/modifying most
panel parameters and monitoring the system state
3-digit LED display, implementing certain
Keypad
commissioning functions
Operation and Querying/modifying all parameters, uploading/
display downloading parameters and monitoring various
LCD operator
status parameters of the system, including running
curves
Connecting the control system and the host computer,
Status monitor
convenient for querying/motoring the system state.
Altitude Below 1000 m (de-rated 1% for each 100 m higher)
Ambient –10°C to +40°C (de-rated if the ambient temperature
temperature is above 40°C)
Environment Humidity Maximum relative humidity 95%, non-condensing
Vibration Maximum vibration: 5.9 m/s2 (0.6 g)
Storage
–20°C to +60°C
temperature
- 26 -
2.5 Physical Appearance and Mounting Dimensions

The following figures show the physical appearance and mounting dimensions of the
NICE3000new.
Figure 2-4 Physical appearance of the NICE3000new
Figure 2-5 Mounting dimensions of the NICE3000new

W
A D
Φ
H
B
- 27 -
Table 2-3 Mounting dimensions of the NICE3000new
A B H D Hole Gross
W
Controller Model Diameter Weight Size
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg)
Single-phase 220 V, range: 200−240 V
NICE-L-C-2002
150 334.5 347 223 143 6.5 10 SIZE-C
NICE-L-C-2003
220-NICE-L-C-4007
220-NICE-L-C-4011 150 334.5 347 223 173.5 6.5 12 SIZE-D
220-NICE-L-C-4015
220-NICE-L-C-4018
220-NICE-L-C-4022 235 541.5 554.5 289.6 223 6.5 14.5 SIZE-E
220-NICE-L-C-4030
NICE-L-C-2002
150 334.5 347 223 143 6.5 10 SIZE-C
NICE-L-C-2003
220-NICE-L-C-4007
220-NICE-L-C-4011 150 334.5 347 223 173.5 6.5 12 SIZE-D
220-NICE-L-C-4015
220-NICE-L-C-4018
220-NICE-L-C-4022 235 541.5 554.5 289.6 223 6.5 14.5 SIZE-E
220-NICE-L-C-4030
NICE-L-C-4002
NICE-L-C-4003 150 334.5 347 223 143 6.5 10 SIZE-C
NICE-L-C-4005
NICE-L-C-4007
NICE-L-C-4011 150 334.5 347 223 173.5 6.5 12 SIZE-D
NICE-L-C-4015
NICE-L-C-4018
NICE-L-C-4022 235 541.5 554.5 289.6 223 6.5 14.5 SIZE-E
NICE-L-C-4030
NICE-L-C-4037
NICE-L-C-4045 260 580 549 385 265 10 32 SIZE-F
NICE-L-C-4055
- 28 -
2.6 Optional Parts

If any optional part in the following table is required, specify it in your order.
Table 2-4 Optional parts of the NICE3000new
Name Model Function Remark

For details, see section
External It is provided for the NICE3000new
MDBUN 2.7 "Selection of
braking unit of 37 kW and above.
Braking Resistor".
It is used to adapt to the push-pull
MCTC-PG-A2 and open-collector incremental -
encoders.
It is used to adapt to the UVW
differential encoder and applied to
MCTC-PG-D synchronous motor. -
PG card
It requires 5 V power supply.
It is used to adapt to the SIN/COS
MCTC-PG-E -
encoder.
It is used to adapt to the
MCTC-PG-F1 absolute encoder (Heidenhain -
ECN413/1313)
The MCTC-CTB is the car control
board of the NICE3000new. It has
Car top
8 DIs, 1 AI and 9 relay outputs (7
board MCTC-CTB -
as standard configuration). It can
(CTB)
communicate with the CCB and
HCB simultaneously.
The HCB receives the passenger
A number of HCB
Hall call calls and displays the floor where
models are available.
board MCTC-HCB the elevator is located and the
For details, see section
(HCB) running direction. It can also be
3.3.
used as car display board.
The MCTC-CCB is another
Car call interface for passengers to interact
board MCTC-CCB with the control system. It mainly -
(CCB) collects the car alls and outputs
the call indicator state.
External
It provides the RJ45
LED It is the external LED display and
MDKE interface for connecting
operation operation panel.
to the controller.
panel
Hand- You can copy
It is the external LCD display and
held LCD MDKE3 parameters by using
operator.
operator this operation panel.
It is a standard 8-core network The cable length is
Extension
MDCAB cable and can be connected to 3 m in the standard
cable
MDKE and MDKE3. configuration.
- 29 -
2.7 Selection of Braking Resistor

The NICE3000new models of 30 kW and below have a built-in braking unit, and you only need
to connect an external braking resistor between PB and + terminals. For models above 30
kW, you need to install a braking unit and a braking resistor externally.
Select the braking resistor based on the configuration listed in the following table.
Table 2-5 Braking resistor selection for the NICE3000new models
Power of Max. Min. Power of

Controller Model Adaptable Resistance Resistance Braking Braking Unit
Motor (kW) (Ω) (Ω) Resistor (W)
Single-phase 220 V
NICE-L-C-2002 1.1 145.0 125.0 300

NICE-L-C-2003 1.5 105.0 90.0 450
220-NICE-L-C-4007 2.2 72.0 63.0 600
220-NICE-L-C-4011 3.7 43.0 37.0 1100
Built-in
220-NICE-L-C-4015 4.0 40.0 35.0 1200
220-NICE-L-C-4018 5.5 29.0 25.0 1600
220-NICE-L-C-4022 11.0 18.0 16.0 3500
220-NICE-L-C-4030 15.0 13.0 13.0 4500
Three-phase 220 V
NICE-L-C-2002 2.2 72.0 65.0 600
NICE-L-C-2003 3.7 54.0 50.0 1100
220-NICE-L-C-4007 4.0 40.0 35.0 1200
220-NICE-L-C-4011 5.5 29.0 25.0 1600
Built-in
220-NICE-L-C-4015 7.5 26.0 22.0 2500
220-NICE-L-C-4018 11.0 14.5 13.0 3500
220-NICE-L-C-4022 15.0 13.0 12.5 4500
220-NICE-L-C-4030 18.5 12.5 12.0 5500
Three-phase 380V
NICE-L-C-4002 2.2 290 230 600
NICE-L-C-4003 3.7 170 135 1100
NICE-L-C-4005 5.5 115 90 1600
NICE-L-C-4007 7.5 85 65 2500
NICE-L-C-4011 11 55 43 3500 Built-in
NICE-L-C-4015 15 43 35 4500
NICE-L-C-4018 18.5 34.0 25 5500
NICE-L-C-4022 22 24 22 6500
NICE-L-C-4030 30 20 16 9000
- 30 -
Power of Max. Min. Power of

Controller Model Adaptable Resistance Resistance Braking Braking Unit
Motor (kW) (Ω) (Ω) Resistor (W)
NICE-L-C-4037 37 16.0 13 11000 MDBUN-45-T
NICE-L-C-4045 45 14.0 11 13500 MDBUN-60-T
NICE-L-C-4055 55 12.0 10 16500 MDBUN-60-T
Note
1. The preceding configuration takes the synchronous motor as an example. The asynchronous
motor has poor energy transfer efficiency, and you can reduce the power of the braking resistor or
increase the resistance of the braking resistor.
2. It is recommended that you select the braking resistor closest to the maximum resistance.
- 31 -
- 32 -
3
Mechanical and Electrical Installation
Mechanical and Electrical Installation NICE3000new User Manual
Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation
3.1 NICE3000new Integrated Elevator Controller
3.1.1 Installation Environment Requirements

Item Requirements
Ambient
-10°C to 50°C
temperature
Install the controller on the surface of an incombustible object, and
Heat dissipation ensure that there is sufficient space around for heat dissipation.
Install the controller vertically on the support using screws.
Free from direct sunlight, high humidity and condensation
Mounting location Free from corrosive, explosive and combustible gas
Free from oil dirt, dust and metal powder
Vibration Less than 0.6 g
3.1.2 Installation Clearance Requirements

The clearance that needs to be reserved varies with the power class of the NICE3000new, as
shown in the following figure.
Figure 3-1 Clearance around the NICE3000new for installation
Hot air
Installation Clearance requirements

B on the NICE3000new of different
power classes
Power Class Clearance Requirements

NICE3000new 1.1-18.5 kW A ≥ 10 mm B ≥ 100 mm
A A
22-45 kW A ≥ 50 mm B ≥ 100 mm
The controller should be

installed veritically upward.
Cold air
The NICE3000new is installed vertically upward on the support with screws fixed into the four
mounting holes, as shown in the following figure.
- 34 -
NICE3000new User Manual Mechanical and Electrical Installation
Figure 3-2 Diagram of mounting holes
Fastener Fastening
torque
1.1 kW ≤ P ≤ 15 kW
2.5 Nm
4-M5x15 bolt With fixing
4-M5×15 screw washer
4-M5x15 washer
NICE3000new 18.5 kW ≤ P ≤ 45 kW 3.5 Nm
integrated 4-M6×15 bolt With fixing
elevator 4-M6×15 screw washer
controller 4-M6×15 washer
Fixing
backplane
The controller is generally installed in the control cabinet of the elevator equipment room.
Pay attention to the following points when designing the control cabinet:
1. The temperature inside the cabinet must not rise to 10°C higher than the temperature
outside the cabinet.
2. A closed control cabinet must be configured with a fan (or other air cooling device such as
air conditioner) to ensure air circulation.
3. The air from the fan must not blow directly to the drive unit because this easily causes
dust adhesion and further a fault on the drive unit.
4. A vent must be available at bottom of the control cabinet to form bottom-up air flow, which
prevents heat island effect on the surface of components or partial thermal conductivity
effect.
5. If the fan cannot meet the cooling requirements, install an air conditioner in the cabinet
or in the equipment room. Note that the temperature inside the cabinet must not be too low;
otherwise, condensation may occur, causing short-circuit of components.
6. For special environment where the temperature is high but cannot be reduced effectively,
de-rate the controller during use.
3.1.3 Terminal Arrangement and Wiring Description

■■ Terminal Arrangement
The following figure shows terminal arrangement of the NICE3000new.
- 35 -
Figure 3-3 Terminal arrangement of the NICE3000new
SET
CN5
PRG UP
CN1
J9
J10
COP
HOP
232
CAN2
CN12
NICE3000new integrated
elevator controller
J12
CN9
J5 J7
J1
CN4
CN3 CN2 CN7
■■ Description of Main Circuit Terminals

The following figure shows main circuit terminal arrangement.
Figure 3-4 Main circuit terminal arrangement
R S T U V W
PB
POWER MOTOR
- 36 -
Figure 3-5 Wiring of the main circuit

Three-phase
power supply
Safety contactor
R S T U V W
PB
POWER MOTOR
(For models of below 37 kW)
Braking resistor
Three-phase AC
power supply
Safety contactor
R S T U V W
PB
POWER MOTOR
(For models of 37 kW and above)
Jumper bar
Braking unit MDBUN
Braking resistor
Table 3-1 Description of main circuit terminals
Terminal Name Description
Three-phase power input

R, S, T Provide 380 VAC power supply.
terminals
Positive and negative Connect the external braking unit and energy
(+), (-)
terminals of DC bus feedback unit for models of 37 kW and above.
Connecting terminals of Connect the braking resistor for models of below
(+), PB
braking resistor 37 kW.
U, V, W Controller output terminals Connect the three-phase motor.
Grounding terminal Must be grounded.
- 37 -
Precautions about wiring of the main circuit terminals are as follows:

1. Select the braking resistor according to the recommended values in the braking resistor
selection table.
2. The circuit on the output side must not be short-circuited or grounded.
3. U, V, W cables of the controller must pass through the grounding metal pipe and be laid
separately or vertically with the control circuit signal cable.
4. If the motor cable is too long, electrical resonance will be generated due to the impact
of distributed capacitance, thus damaging the motor insulation or generating higher
leakage current, causing the controller to trip in overcurrent protection.
5. The grounding terminal of the main circuit must be well grounded with a thick and short
cable. A multi-strand copper cable above 4 mm2 special for grounding is recommended,
and the grounding resistance must not larger than 4 Ω. The grounding electrode cannot
be shared with the power zero line.
■■ Description of Control Circuit Terminals
Table 3-2 Description of control circuit terminals
Mark Code Terminal Name Function Description Terminal Arrangement

•• Input voltage range: X1
X2
X1 to 10–30 VDC X3
CN1 DI X4
X16 •• Input impedance: 4.7 kΩ
X5
X6
X7
•• Optocoupler isolation X8 CN1
X9
X10
•• Input current limit: 5 mA X11
X17 to X12
DI Functions set in F5-01 to X13
X24 X14
X15
F5-24 X16
X17
CN9 X18
X19
X20
Used for the analog load X21 CN9
Ai/M AI X22
cell device X23
X24
M
Ai
External 24
24V/ 24 VDC power supply for
VDC power
COM the entire board
supply
Standard isolated RS485
RS485
communication interface, 24V
CN3 MOD+/- differential COM
CN3
used for hall call and MOD+
signal MOD-
display CAN+
CAN-
CANbus CANbus communication

CAN+/- differential interface, communication
signal with the CTB
Input voltage range: 110
X25 to High-voltage VAC±15% X25
X27/ X26 CN2
CN2 detection Safety circuit and door lock X27
terminal XCM
XCM circuit, function set in F5-37
to F5-39
- 38 -
Mark Code Terminal Name Function Description Terminal Arrangement

Normally-open (NO), Y1
M1
maximum current and Y2
Y1/M1 M2
voltage rating: 5 A, 250 Y3
CN7
CN7 to Relay output M3
VAC Y4
M4
Y6/M6 Y5
Function set in F5-26 to F5- M5
Y6
31 M6
CAN2 CAN2 communication CN4

CN4 CAN2+/- differential interface, used for group
signal control or parallel control CAN2+ CAN2- GND
Used as the interface for

commission software,
RS232 5 4 3 2 1
DB9 cell monitoring, RS232/
CN5 communication 9 8 7 6
interface RS485 parallel control, and
interface
software download for the
MCB and drive board
CN5
RJ45 Operation Used to connect the LED

CN12
interface panel interface or LCD operator
CN12
Optional grounding terminal for AI. The pins marked with COM
J1 J1
"COM" are connected to the ground.
Used to connect the terminal resistor for the CANbus ON
J5 communication control board; the pins marked with "ON" J5
are connected to the terminal resistor.
Grounding terminal of the control board. If it is shorted, the
J7 ground of the control board is connected to the ground of J7
the AC drive.
J12 Interface for connecting the PG card J12
J9/ Factory reserved. Do not short them randomly. Otherwise,

-
J10 the controller may not be used properly.
Table 3-3 Description of indicators on the MCB
Mark Terminal Name Function Description

CAN1
When communication between the MCB and the CTB
COP communication
is normal, this indicator is on (green).
indicator
Modbus
When communication between the MCB and the HCB
HOP communication
is normal, this indicator is on (green).
indicator
- 39 -

This indicator is steady on (green) when communication
Group control
for parallel control or group control is normal, and blinks
CAN2 communication
when the running in parallel mode or group mode is
indicator
normal.
This indicator is on (green) when communication with
Serial communication
232 the host computer or cell/remote monitoring board is
indicator
normal.
X1 to X24 Input signal indicator This indicator is on when the external input is active.
Output signal
Y1 to Y6 This indicator is on when the system output is active.
indicator
3.2 CTB Board (MCTC-CTB)
3.2.1 Dimensions and Installation

The car top board (MCTC-CTB) is the elevator car control board of the NICE3000new. It
consists of 8 DI terminals, 1 AI terminal, and 9 relay output terminals (standard: 7). The
following figures show the appearance and structure and installation method of the CTB.
Figure 3-6 Appearance and structure of the CTB
C3
DM
D2
D1
C2
C1
CM
C3M
B3
B1
B2
BM
AM
B
A
Φ4.9
CN4 CN5
D2 D1 C3 C2 C1 B3 B2 B1 A1
CN10
J2 J9
ON OFF
CAN
CN7
125
115
RESET
MCTC-CTB
CN8
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8
CN2 CN1 CN6 CN3
MOD+
CAN+
MOD-
CAN-
COM
COM
24V
P24
24V
P24
24V
X1
X2
X3
X5
X7
X8
X6
X4
Ai
M
152
162 Unit: mm
Figure 3-7 Installation method of the CTB (unit: mm)
Plastic support not lower

than 1 cm
Self-tapping
screw
4-Φ4.9x30
Self-tapping
screws MCTC-CTB
4-Φ4.9×30
Fixing
MCTC-CTB backplane
Plastic support
higher than 1 cm
Car top
control box
- 40 -
3.2.2 Wiring of CTB Terminals

Table 3-4 Wiring description of CTB terminals
Terminal
Arrangement
External 24 VDC 24 VDC power supply for

+24V/COM 24V
power supply the entire CTB CAN+
CAN-
CN2 COM
CANbus
Connecting the MCB for CN2
CAN+/CAN- communication
CANbus communication
interface
24 VDC power 24 VDC power supply for

+24V/COM 24V
supply the HCB MOD+
MOD-
CN1 COM
Modbus Connecting the HCB for CN1
MOD+/MOD-
communication Modbus communication
24V
Ai
Load cell signal M
CN6 Ai-M 0–10 VDC
input
CN6
24 VDC power
P24 DI common terminal
supply
X1 Light curtain 1
X2 Light curtain 2 X1
X2
X3 Door open limit 1 DI terminal X3
X4
X4 Door open limit 2 1. Photocoupler isolation, P24
CN3 P24
unipolarity input X5
X5 Door close limit 1 X6
2. Input impedance: 3.3 X7
X8
X6 Door close limit 2 kΩ
CN3
Signals of the CTB are
Full-load signal
X7 active when there is 24
(100%)
VDC power supply.
Overload signal
X8
(110%)
- 41 -
Terminal
Arrangement
B1-BM Door open signal 1
B2-BM Door close signal 1 BM

B1
B3-BM Forced door close 1 B2
B3
C1-CM Door open signal 2 CM
Relay output terminal C1
CN4 Contact drive capacity: C2
C2-CM Door close signal 2 C3M
30 VDC, 1 A C3
DM
C3-C3M Forced door close 2 D1
D2
D1-DM Up arrival signal CN4
D2-DM Down arrival signal
A-AM (NC Relay output terminal

A
contact) Car fan and lamp Contact drive capacity: B
CN5 AM
B-AM (NO control 250 VAC, 3 A or 30 VDC, CN5
contact) 1A
DB9-pin port for 1 2 3 4 5
CN7/CN8 communication with Connecting the CCB 6 7 8 9
the CCB
CN7/CN8
Connecting the external

CN10 RJ45 interface
operation panel
CN10
Setting the CTB

addresses: Short OFF
or do not connect the
CTB address terminal for a single
J2 jumper in parallel elevator or the master J2
ON OFF
control elevator in parallel
control; short ON for the
slave elevator in parallel
control.
- 42 -
Terminal
Arrangement
This indicator blinks when

communication between
CANbus
the CTB and the MCB is
communication
normal, and is steady on
indicator
when a communication
fault occurs.
CAN
CAN This indicator blinks RESET
and the CANbus
CANbus communication indicator
Reset communication fault is steady on when a
indicator fault occurs during
communication between
the CTB and the MCB.
This indicator is on X1 X2 X3 X4
X1 to X8 DI indicator (green) when the external
input is active. X5 X6 X7 X8
This indicator is on
Relay output D2 D1 C3 C2
A1 to D2 (green) when the system
indicator
output is active. C1 B3 B2 B1 A1
It is factory reserved.
Do not short it randomly.
J9 Reserved -
Otherwise, the controller
may not be used properly.
Note
•• To prevent external interference on the communication, you are advised to use the shielded
twisted pair as communication cables and lay them parallel.
•• Connect cables to the terminals according to the terminal marks, and fix the cables.
3.3 Display Board (MCTC-HCB)

As an important interface between users and the control system, the MCTC-HCB receives
hall calls and displays the current floor and running direction for the hall. This board can also
be used as car display board.
Monarch provides many types of display boards. The following part describes only a
few common types. If the types available cannot meet your requirements, you can use a
parallel-serial conversion board to make the board provided match your own. For any further
requirement, contact Monarch.
The common types to be described are listed in the following table.
- 43 -
Table 3-5 Common HCB types
Name Feature Size (mm)

HCB-H Dot-matrix display board (red) 144 x 70 x 18
HCB-R1 Ultrathin dot-matrix display board (red) 144 x 70 x 10
Ultrathin segment LCD display board (blue
HCB-D2 144 x 70 x 10
background white display)
4.3-inch segment LCD display board (blue
HCB-U1 143.5 x 79.2 x 9.4
6.4-inch segment LCD display board (blue
HCB-V1 131 x 184.6 x 14.2
3.3.1 HCB-H (Dot-Matrix Display Board)

The following figure shows the appearance and dimensions of HCB-H.
Figure 3-8 Appearance and dimensions of HCB-H
22.9
4-Φ4.2
39.1
MCTC-HCB-H
134.0
144.0
JP1 JP2
22.9
JP3 JP4
UP DOWN
34.3
S1 CN1
56.0
Unit: mm
70.0
The following figure shows the installation method of HCB-H.

Figure 3-9 Installation method of HCB-H
Plastic
support higher
Self-tapping than 1 cm
screw
4-Φ4.9x30
Dot-matrix
display board
HCB-H
9.9
22.5
- 44 -
The following table describes the input and output terminals of HCB-H.
Table 3-6 Input and output terminals of HCB-H
Terminal
Function Terminal Wiring
Name
Up arrival
indicator
Interface for the elevator lock switch and up arrival

indicator Elevator
lock switch
JP1 Pins 2 and 3 are for switch input. input
Pins 1 and 4 are output of the up arrival indicator

(24 VDC output, load capacity: 40 mA).
1234
Down arrival
indicator
Interface for the fire emergency switch and down

arrival indicator Fire
emergency
JP2 Pins 2 and 3 are for switch input. switch input
Pins 1 and 4 are output of the down arrival

indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity: 40 mA).
1234
Up call indicator
Interface for the up call button and indicator

Pins 2 and 3 are for up call input. Up call
JP3 button
Pins 1 and 4 are power supply for the up call
1234
Down call indicator

Interface for the down call button and indicator
Pins 2 and 3 are for down call input. Down call
JP4 button
Pins 1 and 4 are power supply for the down call
1234
Button for setting the floor address.

Hold down the button to adjust the floor address
S1 (range 0–56). After you stop pressing, the address S1
number blinks three times and the setting is
successful.
- 45 -
Terminal
Name
MOD+
MOD-
COM
24V
Modbus communication and power supply terminal
CN1 Pins 2 and 3 are for Modbus communication.
Pins 1 and 4 are for DC power supply.
1234
3.3.2 HCB-R1 (Ultrathin Dot-Matrix Display Board)

The following figure shows the appearance and dimensions of HCB-R1.
Figure 3-10 Appearance and dimensions of HCB-R1
4-Φ3.5
22.8 39.0
144.0
134.0
MCTC-HCB-R1
56.0
CN1 UP DOWN ST XF
J1
Unit: mm
70
The following figure shows the installation method of HCB-R1.

Figure 3-11 Installation method of HCB-R1
Self-tapping Plastic support
screw higher than 1 cm
4-Φ4.9x30
Ultrathin dot-
matrix display
board
HCB-R1
10
6.7
- 46 -
The following table describes the input and output terminals.

Table 3-7 Input and output terminals of HCB-R1
Terminal
Name
Up call indicator

UP button

1234
Down call indicator

DOWN button

1234
Fire
Interface for the fire emergency and elevator lock Elevator
lock
emergency
input
switches input
XF/ST
Pins 1 and 2 are for fire emergency input.
Pins 3 and 4 are for elevator lock input. 1234
Terminal for setting the floor address.

Short J1, and press the UP button or DOWN button
J1 to set the floor address (range 0–56). After the J1
jumper cap is removed, the address is automatically
stored.
MOD+
MOD-
COM
Modbus communication and power supply terminal

24V
CN1 Pins 2 and 3 are for Modbus communication.

Pins 1 and 4 are for DC power supply. 1234
- 47 -
3.3.3 HCB-D2 (Ultrathin Segment LED Display Board)

The following figure shows the appearance and dimensions of HCB-D2.
Figure 3-12 Appearance and dimensions of HCB-D2
4-Φ3.5
134.0
144.0
76.0
49
56.0
CN1 UP DOWN ST XF
J1
70.0 Unit: mm
The following figure shows the installation method of HCB-D2.

Figure 3-13 Installation method of HCB-D2
Plastic support
Self-tapping higher than 1 cm
Screw
4-Φ4.9x30
HCB-D2
10
- 48 -
The following table describes the input and output terminals of HCB-D2.
Table 3-8 Input and output terminals of HCB-D2
Terminal
Name
Up call indicator

UP button
1234
Down call indicator

DOWN button
1234
Fire
Interface for the fire emergency and elevator Elevator
lock input emergency
lock switch input
XF/ST
Pins 3 and 4 are for elevator lock input.
1234
Terminal for setting the floor address

Short J1, and press the UP button or DOWN
J1 button to set the floor address (range 0–56). J1
After the jumper cap is removed, the address is
automatically stored.
Modbus communication and power supply

MOD+
MOD-
COM
24V
terminal
CN1
Pins 2 and 3 are for Modbus communication.
Pins 1 and 4 are for power supply. 1234
- 49 -
3.3.4 HCB-U1 (4.3-inch Segment LED Display Board)

The following figure shows the appearance and dimensions of HCB-U1.
Figure 3-14 Appearance and dimensions of HCB-U1
3-5.5
3-4.5
Φ4.5
53.0
118.0
143.5
92.0
60.0
Unit: mm
79.2
The following figure shows the installation method of HCB-U1.

Figure 3-15 Installation method of HCB-U1
Self-tapping
screw Plastic support
4-Φ4.9x30 higher than 1 cm
HCB-U1
15
9.4
- 50 -
The following table describes the input and output terminals of HCB-U1.
Table 3-9 Input and output terminals of HCB-U1
Terminal
Name
Up call indicator
J1 Pins 1 and 4 are power supply for the up call
button
indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity: 40

mA).
1234
Down call indicator

J2 button
Pins 1 and 4 are power supply for the down
call indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity: 40
mA).
1234
Elevator Fire
Interface for the fire emergency and elevator emergency
lock input
lock switches input
J3
1234

Hold down the button to adjust the floor
S1 address (range: 0−56). After you stop pressing, S1
the address number blinks three times, and
therefore the setting is successful.
MOD+
MOD-

COM
24V
terminal
CN1
- 51 -
3.3.5 HCB-V1 (6.4-inch Segment LED Display Board)

The following figure shows the appearance and dimensions of HCB-V1.
Figure 3-16 Appearance and dimensions of HCB-V1
Φ4.5
105
95
184.6
160
135
Unit: mm 131
The following figure shows the installation method of HCB-V1.

Figure 3-17 Installation method of HCB-V1
Plastic support
higher than 1 cm
Self-tapping
screw
4-Φ4.9x30
HCB-V1
14.2
17.9
- 52 -
The following table describes the input and output terminals of HCB-V1.
Table 3-10 Input and output terminals of HCB-V1
Terminal Name Function Terminal Wiring

Up call indicator
J1 Pins 1 and 4 are power supply for the up call
button
indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity: 40

mA).
1234
Down call indicator

Interface for the down call button and
indicator
Down call
Pins 2 and 3 are for down call input.
J2 button
Pins 1 and 4 are power supply for the down
call indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity:
40 mA).
1234
Elevator Fire
Interface for the fire emergency and elevator lock emergency
lock switch input input
J3
1234

Hold down the button to adjust the floor
S1 address (range: 0−56). After you stop S1
pressing, the address number blinks three
times, and therefore the setting is successful.

MOD+
MOD-
COM
24V
terminal
CN1
3.4 CCB Board (MCTC-CCB)

The car call board (MCTC-CCB) is another interface between users and the control
system. Each CCB comprises 24 inputs and 22 outputs, including 16 floor buttons and 8
functional signals. The CCB mainly collects button calls and outputs signals of the button
call indicators. The need for 31-floor use can be implemented through cascaded connection.
CN2 is an input connector and CN1 is a cascaded output connector.
The following figure shows the appearance and dimensions of MCTC-CCB.
- 53 -
Figure 3-18 Appearance and dimensions of MCTC-CCB
79 mm
69 mm
CN2
Buzzer
MCTC-CCB
JP1 JP2 JP3 JP4

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Floor 1 Floor 2 Floor 3 Floor 4
JP5 JP6 JP7 JP8

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
148 mm
158 mm
JP9 JP10 JP11 JP12

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
JP13 JP14 JP15 JP16

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
JP17 JP18 JP19 JP20

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Door Door Door open Bypass
open close delay
JP21 JP22 JP23 JP24
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Attendant Direction Independent Fire
change running emergency
R2.5
CN1
The following figure shows the installation method of MCTC-CCB.

Figure 3-19 Installation method of MCTC-CCB
Self-tapping Plastic support

screw higher than 1 cm
4-Φ4.9x30
MCTC-CCB
- 54 -
The following table describes the input and output terminals of MCTC-CCB.
Table 3-11 Input and output terminals of MCTC-CCB
No. Interface Pins 2 and 3 Pins 1 and 4 Remarks

1 JP1 Floor 1 button input Floor 1 display output
4 JP4 Floor 4 button input Floor 4 display output Floor button indicator
Floor
7 JP7 Floor 7 button input Floor 7 display output button

10 JP10 Floor 10 button input Floor 10 display output 1234
11 JP11 Floor 11 button input Floor 11 display output For CCB2, the
input signal of JPn
12 JP12 Floor 12 button input Floor 12 display output corresponds to floor
13 JP13 Floor 13 button input Floor 13 display output (16+n) button input.

Door open button Door open display
17 JP17
input output
Door close button Door close display
18 JP18
input output
Door open delay Door open delay
19 JP19
button input display output
20 JP20 Bypass input Bypass display output Invalid for CCB 2.
21 JP21 Attendant input Reserved
Direction change
22 JP22 Reserved
input
Independent running
23 JP23 Reserved
input
24 JP24 Firefighter input Reserved
Note: Pins 1 and 2 are positive of power supply. The pin with white dot mark or that is
rectangular is pin 1.
Note
•• Perform wiring strictly according to the terminal marks and ensure that the button is inserted
securely.
•• Because the MCTC-CCB has the same interface, do not make wrong connection when
connecting multiple boards in series.
- 55 -
3.5 Selection and Use of the MCTC-PG Card

The NICE3000new can implement CLVC only with use of the MCTC-PG card. The following
figures show the appearance of the MCTC-PG card and its installation on the controller.
Directly insert the J1 terminal of the MCTC-PG card into the J12 terminal of the controller.
Figure 3-20 Appearance of the MCTC-PG card and its installation on the controller
PRG UP SET
MCTC-PG
J1 CN1
card
J12
NICE3000new
series integrated
elevator controller
3.5.1 Selection of the MCTC-PG Card

Monarch provides four PG card models, MCTC-PG-A2, MCTC-PG-D, MCTC-PG-E and
MCTC-PG-F1 for different encoder types, as described in the following table.
Table 3-12 Selection of the MCTC-PG card models
Encoder Type Adaptable PG Card Appearance and Dimension
•• Push-pull encoder
12V
•• open-collector MCTC-PG-A2
PGM J2 MCTC-PG-A2 J1
incremental
PGA
PGB
encoder
CN2
M AI
MCTC-PG-D
UVW encoder MCTC-PG-D CN1 D2
D5
J1
D8
D11
D14
- 56 -
Encoder Type Adaptable PG Card Appearance and Dimension
MCTC-PG-E
SIN/COS encoder MCTC-PG-E CN1 J1
Absolute encoder MCTC-PG-F1

MCTC-PG-F1 CN1 J1
(ECN413/1313)
3.5.2 Terminal Wiring and Description of the MCTC-PG Card

The MCTC-PG card is connected to the controller and the encoder as follows:
The J1 terminal and CN1 terminal of the MCTC-PG card are respectively connected to the
J12 terminal of the MCB on the controller and the encoder of the motor.
Different MCTC-PG card models are connected to the MCB in the same way. The
connection method to the encoder depends on the CN1 terminal of the model.
The following figure shows the wiring between MCTC-PG-E and the controller.
Figure 3-21 Wring between MCTC-PG-E and the controller
C3
DM
D2
D1
C2
C1
CM
C3M
B3
B1
B2
BM
AM
B
A
Φ4.9
CN4 CN5
D2 D1 C3 C2 C1 B3 B2 B1 A1
CN10
J2 J9
ON OFF
CAN
CN7
125
115
RESET
MCTC-CTB
CN8
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8
CN2 CN1 CN6 CN3
MOD+
CAN+
MOD-
CAN-
24V
P24
24V
P24
24V
X1
X2
X3
X5
X7
X8
X6
X4
CO
CO
Ai
M
M
M
152
162 Unit: mm
The following table defines the CN1 terminals of different MCTC-PG card models.
Table 3-13 Definitions of the CN1 terminals of different MCTC-PG card models
MCTC-PG-A2 MCTC-PG-D MCTC-PG-E MCTC-PG-F1

1 12V 1 A+ 6 NC 11 W+ 1 B- 6 A- 11 C- 1 DT+ 6 GND 11 B+
2 PGM 2 A- 7 U+ 12 W- 2 NC 7 COM 12 D+ 2 DT- 7 U5V 12 B-
3 PGA 3 B+ 8 U- 13 VCC 3 Z+ 8 B+ 13 D- 3 CK+ 8 GND 13
- 57 -
MCTC-PG-A2 MCTC-PG-D MCTC-PG-E MCTC-PG-F1

4 PGB 4 B- 9 V+ 14 COM 4 Z- 9 VCC 14 NC 4 CK- 9 A+ 14
5 NC 10 V- 15 NC 5 A+ 10 C+ 15 NC 5 5V 10 A- 15
12V 6 6 6
1 11 1 11 1 11
7 7 7
PGM 2 12 2 12 2 12
8 8 8
3 13 3 13 3 13
PGA 9 9 9
4 14 4 14 4 14
PGB 10 10 10
5 15 5 15 5 15
CN1
CN1 CN1 CN1
3.5.3 Precautions on Connecting the MCTC-PG Card

1. The cable from the MCTC-PG card to the encoder must be separated from the cables of
the control circuit and the power circuit. Parallel cabling in close distance is forbidden.
2. The cable from the MCTC-PG card to the encoder must be a shielded cable. The shield
must be connected to the PE on the controller side. To minimize interference, single-end
grounding is suggested.
3. The cable from the MCTC-PG card to the encoder must run through the duct separately
and the metal shell is reliably grounded.
3.5.4 Selection of Adaptable Motor

The main counters of the electrical relationship between the controller and the motor are
voltage and current.
1. In general elevator applications, the input mains voltage is 380 V, and the motor voltage
can only be equal to or smaller than 380 V. Thus, when selecting the NICE3000new, you
can take only the current of the motor into consideration.
2. When the NICE3000new is designed, large safety allowance is reserved for the main
power module. The controller can run properly within 1.1 times of the nominal output
current. During stable running, the maximum output torque is 150% of the rated torque
and can reach up to 200% of the rated torque for a short time.
Therefore, for the motor with the rated voltage of 380 V, you can select the controller of the
same power class. As long as the rated current of the motor is smaller than 1.1 times of the
output current of the controller, the controller of the same power class can also be used.
Generally speaking, when selecting an adaptable motor, ensure that the rated current
of the motor is equal to or smaller than the output current of the controller. For technical
specifications of the controller, see section 2.3.
- 58 -
3.6 Selection of Peripheral Electrical Devices
3.6.1 Description of Peripheral Electrical Devices

1. Do not install the capacitor or surge suppressor on the output side of the controller.
Otherwise, it may cause faults to the controller or damage to the capacitor and surge
suppressor.
2. Inputs/Outputs (main circuit) of the controller contain harmonics, which may interfere
with the communication device connected to the controller. Therefore, install an anti-
interference filter to minimize the interference.
3. Select the peripheral devices based on actual applications as well as by referring to
section 3.6.2.
The following table describes the peripheral electrical devices.
Table 3-14 Description of peripheral electrical devices
Part Mounting Location Function Description
Forefront of controller Cut off the power supply of the controller and
MCCB
power input side provide short-circuit protection.
Apply/Cut off the power supply of the controller.

Safety Between MCCB and the
contactor controller input side The close/open of the contactor is controlled by the
external safety circuit.
Improve the power factor of the input side.
Eliminate the higher harmonics on the input side to
AC input
Controller input side provide effective protection on the rectifier bridge.
reactor
Eliminate the input current unbalance due to
unbalance between the power phases.
AC Between the controller If the distance between the controller and the
output output side and the motor, motor is greater than 100 m, install an AC output
reactor close to the controller reactor.
3.6.1 Selection of Peripheral Electrical Devices

Proper cable specification and cabling greatly improves anti-interference capability and
safety of the system, facilitating installation and commissioning and enhancing system
running stability.
The following table describes the specifications of peripheral electrical devices for selection.
Table 3-15 Specification of peripheral electrical devices for selection
Controller Contactor Cable of Main Cable of Control Grounding

MCCB (A)
Model (A) Circuit (mm²) Circuit (mm²) Cable (mm²)
NICE-2002 16 18 2.5 0.75 2.5
NICE-2003 25 25 2.5 0.75 2.5
NICE-4002 10 12 2.5 0.75 2.5
- 59 -
Controller Contactor Cable of Main Cable of Control Grounding

MCCB (A)
Model (A) Circuit (mm²) Circuit (mm²) Cable (mm²)
NICE-4003 16 18 2.5 0.75 2.5
NICE-4005 20 25 2.5 0.75 2.5
NICE -4007 25 25 4 0.75 4
NICE -4011 32 32 4 0.75 4
NICE-4015 40 40 6 0.75 6
NICE-4018 50 50 10 1 10
NICE-4022 50 50 10 1 10
NICE-4030 65 65 16 1 16
NICE-4037 80 80 25 1 16
NICE-4045 100 115 35 1 16
NICE-4055 125 125 50 1 25
Note
To prevent the strong power from interfering with the weak power, the strong-power cables must
be separated from the weak-power cables during cabling in the shaft. Grounding cables must be
used to separate strong-power and weak-power traveling cables. "Strong power" refers to the
voltage of 36 V and above.
3.7 Electrical Wiring Diagram of the NICE3000new Control System

Figure 3-22 Electrical wiring diagram of the NICE3000new control system
See the last page of this chapter.
3.8 Installation of Shaft Position Signals

In elevator control, to implement landing accurately and running safely, car position needs to
be identified based on shaft position signals.
These shaft position signals include the leveling switches, up/down slow-down switches, up/
down limit switches, and up/down final limit switches.
These shaft position signals are directly transmitted by the shaft cables to the MCB of the
controller. For the electrical wiring method, refer to Figure 3-22.
The following figure shows the arrangement of shaft position signals in the shaft.
- 60 -
Figure 3-23 Arrangement of shaft position signals

Up final limit
switch
150 mm
Up limit
switch
30-50 mm
Top leveling
position
V² (V: Rated
L L>
2 x F3-08 elevator speed)
Up slow-down switch
Leveling flag
Up final limit
switch D (floor N)
80 ≤ D ≤ 200 mm
150 mm
Up limit
switch
30-50 mm
Top leveling
position Down slow-down switch
2 x V²
F3-08 (V: Rated
Rated
LL LL >> (V:
V²
2 x F3-08 elevator speed)
elevator speed)
Bottom levelingUp slow-down switch

position
30─50 mm
Down limit
switch
150 mm
Leveling flag
D (floor N)
Down final 80 ≤ D ≤ 200 mm
limit switch
3.8.1 Installation of Leveling Signals

Leveling signals comprise the leveling switchDown
and slow-down
leveling switch
plate and is directly connected
to the input terminal of the controller. It is used to enable the car to land at each floor
accurately.
2 x F3-08 (V: Rated
L L>
The leveling switches are generally installed on V² theelevator the car. The NICE3000new system
top ofspeed)
supports the installation of 1−3 leveling switches. The leveling plate is installed on the guide
rail in the shaft. A leveling plate needs to be installed at each floor. Ensure that leveling
plates at all floors are mounted with the leveling
Bottom same depth and verticality.
position
30─50 mm
The following figure shows the installation of leveling signals
Down limit
switch
150 mm
- 61 -
Down final
limit switch
Figure 3-24 Installation of leveling signals

Leveling
switch
Up leveling signal
detection
Door zone signal

detection
Leveling flag
Down leveling signal
detection
Car
The following table describes the installation requirements of leveling switches

Table 3-16 Installation requirements of leveling switches
Number of
Connecting to Input Terminals of Setting of
Leveling Installation Method
Controller Function Code
Switches
+24 VDC F5-01 = 0

Door zone X1 F5-02 = 35 (NC)
signal X2
Door zone
X3 F5-03 = 0
1 signal detection
+24 VDC F5-01 = 0

Door zone X1 F5-02 = 03 (NO)
signal X2
X3 F5-03 = 0
+24 VDC
F5-01 = 33 (NC)
Up leveling X1 F5-02 = 0
Up leveling X2
signal detection Down leveling F5-03 = 34 (NC)
X3
2
Down leveling +24 VDC
signal detection F5-01 = 01 (NO)
Up leveling X1 F5-02 = 0
X2
Down leveling X3
F5-03 = 02 (NO)
- 62 -
Number of
Connecting to Input Terminals of Setting of
Leveling Installation Method
Controller Function Code
Switches
+24 VDC
F5-01 = 33 (NC)
Up leveling
X1 F5-02 = 35 (NC)
Door zone signal X2
Down leveling X3 F5-03 = 34 (NC)
Up leveling
signal detection
Door zone
3 signal detection
+24 VDC
Down leveling
signal detection
F5-01 = 01 (NO)
Up leveling
X1 F5-02 = 03 (NO)
Door zone signal
X2
Down leveling X3 F5-03 = 02 (NO)
Note
•• When installing leveling plates, ensure that plates at all floors are mounted with the same depth
and verticality. Otherwise, the leveling accuracy will be affected. The recommended length of
the flag is 80–200 mm.
•• More leveling input signals need to be added if the door pre-open function is used. In this case,
you need to increase the length of the plate properly. For details on the door pre-open module,
contact Monarch or local agent.
3.8.2 Installation of Slow-Down Switches

The slow-down switch is one of the key protective components of the NICE3000 new,
protecting the elevator from over travel top terminal or over travel bottom terminal at
maximum speed when the elevator position becomes abnormal.
The NICE3000new system supports a maximum of three pairs of slow-down switches. The
slow-down switch 1, slow-down switch 2 and slow-down switch 3 are installed from the
two ends of the shaft to the middle floor one by one. Generally, only one pair of slow-down
switches is required for the low-speed elevator. Two or three pairs of slow-down switches
are required for the high-speed elevator.
The slow-down distance L indicates the distance from the slow-down switch to the leveling
plate at the terminal floor. The calculating formula is as follows:
V²
L>
2 x F3-08
In the formula, L indicates the slow-down distance, V indicates the F0-04 (Rated elevator
speed), and F3-08 indicates the special deceleration rate.
The default value of F3-08 (Special deceleration rate) is 0.9 m/s2. The slow-down distances
calculated based on different rated elevator speeds are listed in the following table:
- 63 -
Table 3-17 Slow-down distances based on different rated elevator speeds
Rated Elevator Speed V ≤ 1.5 m/s 1.5 m/s < V ≤ 2.4 m/s 2.4 m/s < V ≤ 3.7 m/s
Distance of slow-down 1 1.3 m to H/2 1.3 m 1.3 m
Distance of slow-down 2 - 3.2 m 3.2 m
Distance of slow-down 3 - - 8.0 m
Note
•• "H" in the table indicates the landing height. The slow-down 1 will reset the terminal floor
display, and the slow-down 1 switch needs to be installed within H/2.
•• The slow-down distances above are calculated on the basis of the default values (special
deceleration rate 0.9 m/s2, and acceleration rate and deceleration rate 0.6 m/s2).
•• Increasing the acceleration rate and deceleration rate or reducing the special deceleration rate
may bring safety hazard. If any change is need, re-calculate the slow-down distance by using
the above formula.
3.8.3 Installation of Limit Switches

The up limit switch and down limit switch is to protect the elevator from over travel top/
bottom terminal when the elevator does not stop at the leveling position of the terminal floor.
•• The up limit switch needs to be installed 30−50 mm away from the top leveling position.
The limit switch acts when the car continues to run upward 30−50 mm from the top
leveling position.
•• The down limit switch needs to be installed 30−50 mm away from the bottom leveling
position. The limit switch acts when the car continues to run downward 30−50 mm from
the bottom leveling position.
3.8.4 Installation of Final Limit Switches

The final limit switch is to protect the elevator from over travel top/bottom terminal when the
elevator does not stop completely upon passing the up/down limit switch.
•• The up final limit switch is mounted above the up limit switch. It is usually 150 mm away
from the top leveling position.
•• The down final limit switch is mounted below the down limit switch. It is usually 150 mm
away from the bottom leveling position.
- 64 -
Figure 3-22 Electrical wiring diagram of the NICE3000new control system

Note: The functions of I/O terminals of the
Braking resistor controller are set in group F5. The wiring
in this figure uses the default setting.
Safety )
contactor
R + – PB K1 Braking
Three-phase CN5 U Motor mechanism -C
H
AC power S v( M
supply V M K2 o
ic
T PRG UP SET USB
e M
W
C a
T n
24V
n
0V
RUN LOCAL/REMOT FED/REV TUNE/TC
B
A
o
Hz A V
u
Encoder
RPM %
PRG ENTER
n
c
CN12
QUICK
STOP
e
RUN MF.K
RES
m
Shield e
+24 VDC
n
t
Up leveling X1 J12 PG card
Door zone X2 MCTC-PG CN10
Down leveling X3 CN1 24V 24V
Safety circuit feedback
Door lock circuit feedback
X4
X5 CN1 MOD+
MOD-
MOD+
MOD-
RUN contactor feedback X6 COM COM
Brake contactor feedback X7
X8
24V
Inspection
X9 Inspection up
COM
X10 Inspection signal
circuit
X11 Inspection down CN3 MOD+
MOD- 24 V
X1
X2
Door 1 light curtain
Up limit X12 CAN+ Door 2 light curtain
Down limit X13
new
CAN+
CAN- CN2 X3 Door 1 open limit
NICE3000
CAN- X4 Door 2 open limit
Up slow-down switch 1 X14 COM
Down slow-down switch 1
Up slow-down switch 2
X15
X16 CN3 P24
P24 Car display
Top floor Traveling cable X5 Door 1 close limit
Down slow-down switch 2 X17 MCTC-CTB X6 Door 2 close limit
Up slow-down switch 3
Down slow-down switch 3
X18
X19 CN9 X7
X8
Full-load signal
Overload signal
X20
X21 CN1
X22
Analog load X23 Y1 K1 24V
CN5 Car lamp/fan

cell signal X24 M1 MOD+ A
Y2 MOD- B BM
M
Ai M2 K2 COM AM control B1 Control of front door machine
Y3 B2
B3
X25
X26 CN7 M3
Y4 CM
Inspection
X27 CN2 M4 24V
Ai CN6 Wiring for an
CN4 C1
C2
Control of back door machine
circuit
XCOM Y5
M
analog load C3M
M5 cell device
CAN2+ Y6 MCTC-HCB C3
DM J1
CAN2-
GND
CN4 M6
D1 J2 Arrival gong
D2 J3
CN7 CN8
CN1
24V
+24 VDC MOD+
MOD-
Inspection 1 Inspection 2 COM
X9 Inspection
signal
Inspection 1
Up
CN2 CN2
Up Down X10
common Inspection up
X11
Inspection down MCTC-HCB
Down Note: The cables for connecting the
MCTC-CCB are provided by Monarch and
the model is MCTC-CCL. Specify it in
MCTC-CCB MCTC-CCB your order.
Bottom
floor
24V
MOD+ CN1 CN1
MOD-
COM
Car
Hall operation
box Cascaded connection
MCTC-HCB
4
Use of the NICE3000new
Use of the NICE3000new NICE3000new User Manual
Chapter 4 Use of the NICE3000new
The NICE3000new supports four commissioning tools, 3-button keypad on the MCB, LED
operation panel, LCD operator, and host computer monitoring software.
Tool Function Description Remark

It is used to enter the shaft commissioning
Onboard 3-button keypad Standard
commands and view floor information.
It is used to view and modify parameters related
LED operation panel Optional
to elevator drive and control.
It is used to view parameters related to elevator
LCD operator drive and control in diagram and text, and modify Optional
and copy these parameters.
It is used to monitor the current elevator state,
Host computer monitoring
view and modify all parameters, and upload and Optional
software
download parameters on the PC.
The following part describes the commonly used keypad, LED operation panel, and LCD
operator in detail.
4.1 Use of the Onboard Keypad

The onboard keypad consists of three 7-segment LEDs and three buttons. You can view
information about the controller and enter simple commands on the keypad.
Note
The keypad is exposed, and pay attentions to the following points during use:
1. Wear insulated gloves when performing operations on the keypad to prevent electric shock or
damage to the controller components due to electrostatic discharge.
2. Do not use a metal or sharp tool to press the button to prevent the short-circuit fault or damage
to the components on the MCB.
The following figure shows the appearance of the keypad.

Figure 4-1 Appearance of the keypad
3 2 1
A
F B
G
PRG UP SET E C
D DP
As shown in the preceding figure, the three buttons are PRG, UP, and SET. The functions of
the three buttons are as follows:
•• PRG: Press this button in any state to display the current function group number.
You can press the UP button to change the function group number.
- 66 -
NICE3000new User Manual Use of the NICE3000new
•• UP: Press this button to increase the function group number.

Currently, the MCB defines a total of 13 function code groups, namely, F0 to F9, and
FA to FC. You can press the UP button to display them in turn. In addition, in special
function code group menu, you can input simple references by using the UP button.
•• SET: In the function code group menu, press this button to enter the menu of the
function code group.
In special function code group menu, after you input a simple reference and press this
button to save the setting, the display will return to the F0 menu by default.
The following figure shows the setting of increasing the called floor to 5.
Figure 4-2 Setting the called floor
Current floor Level-I menu

When there is a blinking digit,
(Select the function
(default display) code group) press the UP button to modify it.
01 PRG
Switch F0 UP
Increase F1 SET
Enter
Level-II menu
PRG
(Set the
parameter value) Without 04 Increase
UP
05 Saving
SET
saving
The function code groups displayed on the keypad are described as follows:
1. F0: display of floor and running direction
The F0 menu is displayed on the keypad by default upon power-on. The first 7-segment
LED indicates the running direction, while the last two 7-segment LEDs indicate the
current floor number of the elevator.
When the elevator stops, the first 7-segment LED has no display. When the elevator
runs, the first 7-segment LED blinks to indicate the running direction.
When a system fault occurs, the 7-segment LEDs automatically display the fault code
and blink. If the fault is reset automatically, the F0 menu is displayed.
2. F1: command input of the running floor
After you enter the F1 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display the bottom floor (F6-01). You
can press the UP button to set the destination floor within the range of lowest to top and
then press the SET button to save the setting. The elevator runs to the destination floor,
and the display automatically switches over to the F0 menu at the same time.
3. F2: fault reset and fault code display
After you enter the F2 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display "0". You can press the UP
button to change the setting to 1 or 2.
‫ ־־‬Display "1": If you select this value and press the SET button, the system fault is reset.
Then, the display automatically switches over to the F0 menu.
‫ ־־‬Display "2": If you select this value and press the SET button, the 7-segment LEDs
display the 11 fault codes and occurrence time circularly. You can press the PRG button
to exit.
- 67 -
4. F3: time display

After you enter the F3 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display the current system time
circularly.
5. F4: contract number display
After you enter the F4 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display the user’s contract number.
6. F5: running times display
After you enter the F5 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display the elevator running times
circularly.
7. F6: door open/close control
After you enter the F6 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display "1-1", and the UP and SET
buttons respectively stand for the door open button and door close button. You can
press the PRG button to exit.
8. F7: shaft auto-tuning command input
After you enter the F7 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display "0". You can select 0 or 1
here, where "1" indicates the shaft auto-tuning command available.
After you select "1" and press the SET button, shaft auto-tuning is implemented if the
conditions are met. Meanwhile, the display switches over to the F0 menu. After shaft
auto-tuning is complete, F7 is back to "0" automatically. If shaft auto-tuning conditions
are not met, fault code "Err35" is displayed.
9. F8: test function
After you enter the F8 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display "0". The setting range of F8 is
1–4, described as follows:
‫ ־־‬1: Hall call forbidden
‫ ־־‬2: Door open forbidden
‫ ־־‬3: Overload forbidden
‫ ־־‬4: Limit switches disabled
After the setting is complete, press the SET button. Then the 7-segment LEDs display
"Err88" and blink, prompting that the elevator is being tested. When you press PRG to
exit, F8 is back to 0 automatically.
10. F9: reserved
11. FA: auto-tuning
After you enter the FA menu, the 7-segment LEDs display "0". The setting range of FA is
1 and 2, as follows:
‫ ־־‬1: With-load auto-tuning
‫ ־־‬2: No-load auto-tuning
After the setting is complete, press the SET button. Then the 7-segment LEDs display
"TUNE", and the elevator enters the auto-tuning state. After confirming that the elevator
meets the safe running conditions, press the SET button again to start auto-tuning.
- 68 -
After auto-tuning is complete, the 7-segment LEDs display the current angle for 2s, and
then switch over to the F0 menu.
You can press the PRG button to exit the auto-tuning state.
12. FB: CTB state display
After you enter the FB menu, the 7-segment LEDs display the input/output state of the
CTB. The following table describes the meaning of each segment of the LEDs.
Table 4-1 Input/Output state of the CTB
LED Segment Meaning of

Meaning of ON Diagram
No. Mark Segment
A Light curtain 1 Light curtain 1 input active

B Light curtain 2 Light curtain 2 input active
C Door open limit 1 Door open limit 1 input active
D Door open limit 2 Door open limit 2 input active
1
E Door close limit 1 Door close limit 1 input active
F Door close limit 2 Door close limit 2 input active
G Full-load Full-load input active
DP Overload Overload input active A
2 A Light-load Light-load signal active F B

G
A Door open 1 Door open 1 relay output
E C
B Door close 1 Door close 1 relay output
Forced door Forced door close 1 relay D DP
C
close 1 output
D Door open 2 Door open 2 relay output
3 E Door close 2 Door close 2 relay output
Forced door Forced door close 2 relay
F
close 2 output
G Up arrival gong Up arrival gong relay output
Down arrival Down arrival gong relay
DP
gong output
13. FC: elevator direction change (same as the function of F2-10)

‫ ־־‬0: Running direction and position pulse direction unchanged
‫ ־־‬1: Running direction reversed, position pulse direction reversed
‫ ־־‬2: Running direction unchanged, position pulse direction reversed
‫ ־־‬3: Running direction reversed, position pulse direction unchanged
- 69 -
4.2 Use of the LED Operation Panel

The LED operation panel is connected to the RJ45 interface of the controller by using an
8-core flat cable. You can modify the parameters, monitor the working status and start or
stop the controller by operating the operation panel. The following figure shows the LED
operation panel.
Figure 4-3 Diagram of the LED operation panel
Function
indicator RUN LOCAL/REMOT FED/REV TUNE/TC
Data display
Unit indicator
Hz A V
RPM %
Increment
Programming key
key PRG ENTER Confirm key
Menu key QUICK Shift key

Decrement
key
STOP
RUN key RUN MF.K Stop/Reset key
RES
Fault hiding key
4.2.1 Description of Indicators

■■ RUN
ON indicates that the controller is in the running state, and OFF indicates that the controller
is in the stop state.
■■ LOCAL/REMOT
Reserved.
■■ FWD/REV
ON indicates up direction of the elevator, and OFF indicates down direction of the elevator.
■■ TUNE/TC
ON indicates the auto-tuning state.
■■ Unit Indicators
means that the indicator is ON, and means that the indicator is OFF.
Hz A V Hz: unit of frequency

RPM %
Hz A V A: unit of current
RPM %
- 70 -
Hz A V V: unit of voltage
RPM %
Hz A V RPM: unit of rotational speed

RPM %
Hz A V %: percentage
RPM %
4.2.2 Description of Keys on the Operation Panel

Table 4-2 Description of keys on the operation panel
Key Name Function
PRG Programming Enter or exit Level-I menu.
Enter the menu interfaces level by level, and confirm the

ENTER Confirm
parameter setting.
Increment Increase data or function code.
Decrement Decrease data or function code.
Select the displayed parameters in turn in the stop or

Shift running state, and select the digit to be modified when
modifying parameters.
RUN Run Start the controller in the operation panel control mode.
STOP Stop the controller when it is in the running state and

Stop/Reset
RES perform the reset operation when it is in the fault state.
Press this key to display or hide the fault information in

MF.K Fault hiding
the fault state, which facilitates parameter viewing.
QUICK Quick Enter or exit Level-I quick menu.
4.2.3 Operation Procedure

The LED operation panel adopts three-level menu.
The three-level menu consists of function code group (Level I), function code (Level II), and
function code setting value (level III), as shown in the following figure.
- 71 -
Figure 4-4 Operation procedure on the operation panel
Status parameter Level-I menu If there is a blinking digit, press

(Select the function / / to modify the digit.
(default display) code group)
0.000 PRG
F0 ENTER
PRG
Level-II menu
(Select the
function code)
PRG F0.06 ENTER F0.07 ENTER
Next function
ENTER code
Level-III menu
(Set the value of
PRG
Not to save
50.00 To save
the function code) the setting the setting
You can return to Level II menu from Level III menu by pressing PRG or ENTER . The
difference between the two is as follows:
•• After you press ENTER , the system saves the parameter setting first, and then goes
back to Level II menu and shifts to the next function code.
•• After you press PRG , the system does not save the parameter setting, but directly
returns to Level II menu and remains at the current function code.

The following figure shows the shift between the three levels of menus.
Figure 4-5 Shift between the three levels of menus
ENTER
FD F3
FE FP F0 F1 F2
…FX-00
PRG FD-00 FE-00 F2-00 F3-00
FP-00 F0-00 F1-00
FD-26 FE-56 FP-02 F2-18 F3-21

F0-07 F1-25
In Level III menu, if the parameter has no blinking digit, it means that the parameter cannot
be modified. This may be because:
•• Such a parameter is only readable, such as actually detected parameters and running
record parameters.
•• Such a parameter cannot be modified in the running state and can only be changed at
stop.
- 72 -
4.2.4 Viewing Status Parameters

In the stop or running state, the operation panel can display multiple status parameters.
Whether parameters are displayed is determined by the equivalent binary bits converted
from the values of FA-01 and FA-02.
In the stop state, a total of 12 parameters can be displayed circularly by pressing

. You can select the parameters to be displayed by setting FA-02 (each of the binary bits
converted from the value of FA-02 indicates a parameter).
Figure 4-6 Shift between parameters displayed in the stop state
Shift between parameters

displayed in the stop state
lo C
B w h C a
R u b In ig
h n I u
r
lo d
a s its p u O rr a -
o S
te vo t b p e C d w y
d te its u t
u
tp n u n
a
t C
C st
sp lta rm te t rr S ra T e
u fl e d B T m
e g rm t o n ilo
stw te in B
e e in fu o t d o st
d a in n r p a p u a
l a ct o n s u tp tu
l s c p t
io e
In the running state, a total of 16 parameters can be displayed circularly by pressing
iti e s u s
n o e ta t
n d tu s
ta
s tu
. You can select the parameters to be displayed by setting FA-01 (each of the binary bits
s
converted from the value of FA-02 indicates a parameter).

Figure 4-7 Shift between parameters displayed in the running state
Shift between parameters

displayed in the running state
lo h C
ig a to
-
w I C r S rq
h n
R R
a
B
u O O O b In b p O u
rr C
lo C
ys u
P
u te s u u its p u its u u e u a
d T C te e
re
n vo tp tp u t t tp n rr B T m cu
n d u u tp te te t e B
u in
For details, see the description of corresponding parameters in Chapter 7.
in sp lta t t u rm rm t flo n o st rr
g vo cu t fu t p u a e
sp e g fr in in o p u tp tu n
e e lta rr e a n r o t u t
e d e q a l ct si st s
e g n u l io tio a t
d e t e tu s
n n ta
4.3 Use of the LCD Operator

cy n s tu
s
The LCD operator is a commissioning tool specially designed for the NICE3000new, and is
connected to the RJ45 interface of the NICE3000new by using an 8-core flat cable. The LCD
operator provides functions such as parameter modification, parameter copy, curve display,
port monitoring, error help, and call display, which facilitates monitoring on all system states.
It is portal and can display various information, making commissioning of the elevator more
convenient.
The following figure shows the appearance of the LCD operator.
- 73 -
Figure 4-8 Appearance of the LCD operator
Display
Right key
Left key
Knob/Confirm
Run key key
Programming Stop key

key
4.3.1 Keys on the LCD operator
Key Name Function

Press this key to implement the function displayed on the lower
Left
left corner of the display.
Press this key to implement the function displayed on the lower
Right
right corner of the display.
It has both the knob function and confirm key function. You can
rotate the knob to increase or decrease the function code or
Knob/Confirm
data, and press the confirm key to execute the operation or move
the cursor.
Press this key to start the controller in operation panel control

Run
mode.
In operation panel control mode, press this key to stop the

Stop
running in the running state and reset the fault in the fault state.
PRG Programming Press this key to return to the upper level menu.
4.3.2 Description of the Display

The following figure shows the structure of the display on the LCD operator (with the
monitoring interface as an example).
Figure 4-9 Structure of the display
Status bar,
indicatinging the real-
Normal 01 Err31
time elevator status 1 Set speed:
0.534
Main display area,
indicating the
m/s required information
2 Rated speed: 1.600 m/s

Function indication
bar, indicating the
3 Bus voltage: 220.3 V
function of the key Menu
- 74 -
The display of the LCD operator is divided into the following three areas:
•• Status bar
It displays the current state information of the elevator, such as running mode, elevator
state, current floor, and fault information at stop.
•• Main display area
It displays the values that can be viewed or modified for different functions. It is the main
operation interface.
•• Operation indication bar
It indicates the functions of the left key and the right key. In the preceding figure, if you
press the right key, the operation panel switches to the menu interface.
4.3.3 Brief Description of the Interfaces

•• Startup interface
This interface displays when the LCD operator is powered on. After staying on this
interface for a few seconds, the LCD operator switches to the next interface if the
verification is correct. If the verification is incorrect, a prompt is displayed. All keys are
invalid on this interface.
Figure 4-10 Startup interface
Elevator control expert

Step with the world
MDKE3-MNK
The monitoring interface automatically appears after the startup interface. The
monitoring interface displays the values of the monitoring parameters. A maximum of 32
parameters can be monitored totally, set in FA-01 and FA-02. You can rotate the knob to
view these parameter values circularly.
Figure 4-11 Monitoring interface
Normal 01 Err31
1 Set speed:
0.534 m/s
2 Rated speed: 1.600 m/s

3 Bus voltage: 220.3 V
Menu
•• Main operation interface

The main operation interface includes seven icons. You can select each icon by rotating
the knob and press the Confirm key to enter the corresponding interface.
- 75 -
Figure 4-12 Main operation interface
Normal 01
Parameters Copy Port
?
Curve view Call Err help
Back Select
‫ ־־‬Parameters
You can view or modify all function codes of the controller. A three-level menu is
supported, and you can read and modify the function code value in Level III menu.
‫ ־־‬Copy
You can copy parameters of the controller to the LCD operator and download
parameters to the controller. The LCD operator can store three groups of elevator
parameters.
‫ ־־‬Port
On this interface, you can view the status of all input and output terminals of the
controller.
‫ ־־‬Curve view
You can view the curve of specified controller parameters (such as torque current and
feedback frequency) changed with the time.
‫ ־־‬Call
You can use this function to simulate the car call and hall call signals of all floors.
‫ ־־‬Err help
You can view the causes and solutions corresponding to the error code on this interface.
‫ ־־‬Operation panel setting
On this interface, you can set the parameters of the LCD operator, including the
password, time, date, and language. The setting is irrelative to the controller.
- 76 -
5
System Commissioning
and Application Example
System Commissioning and Application Example NICE3000new User Manual
Chapter 5 System Commissioning and Application Example
5.1 System Commissioning
CAUTION
•• Ensure that there is no person in the shaft or car before performing commissioning on the
elevator.
•• Ensure that the peripheral circuit and mechanical installation are ready before performing
commissioning.
The following figure shows the commissioning procedure of the system.

Figure 5-1 Commissioning procedure of the system
Start
Check the Perform load cell

peripheral circuit auto-tuning
Check the Commission the

encoder door machine
Set related Perform trial

parameters of the normal-speed
elevator running
Perform motor Check the

auto-tuning leveling
accuracy
Perform trial Perform riding

inspection comfort
running commissioning
Perform shaft Perform function

auto-tuning commissioning
End
5.1.1 Check Before Commissioning

The elevator needs to be commissioned after being installed; the correct commissioning
guarantees safe and normal running of the elevator. Before performing electric
commissioning, check whether the electrical part and mechanical part are ready for
commissioning to ensure safety.
At least two persons need to be onsite during commissioning so that the power supply can
be cut off immediately when an abnormality occurs.
- 78 -
NICE3000new User Manual System Commissioning and Application Example
1. Check the field mechanical and electric wiring.

Before power-on, check the peripheral wiring to ensure component and personal safety.
The items to be checked include:
1) Whether the component models are matched
2) Whether the safety circuit is conducted and reliable
3) Whether the door lock circuit is conducted and reliable
4) Whether the shaft is unobstructed, and the car has no passenger and meets the
conditions for safe running
5) Whether the cabinet and traction motor are well grounded
6) Whether the peripheral circuit is correctly wired according to the drawings of the vendor
7) Whether all switches act reliably
8) Whether there is short-circuit to ground by checking the inter-phase resistance of the
main circuit
9) Whether the elevator is set to the inspection state
10) Whether the mechanical installation is complete (otherwise, it will result in equipment
damage and personal injury)
2. Check the encoder.
The pulse signal from the encoder is critical to accurate control of the system. Before
commissioning, check the following items carefully:
1) The encoder is installed reliably with correct wiring. For details on the encoder wiring,
see section 3.7.
2) The signal cable and strong-current circuit of the encoder are laid in different ducts to
prevent interference.
3) The encoder cable is preferably directly connected to the control cabinet. If the cable
is not long enough and an extension cable is required, the extension cable must be
a shielding cable and preferably welded to the original encoder cable by using the
soldering iron.
4) The shielding cable of the encoder cable is grounded on the end connected to the
controller (only one end is grounded to prevent interference).
3. Check the power supply before power-on.
1) The inter-phase voltage of the user power supply is within (380 V ± 15%), and the
unbalance degree does not exceed 3%.
2) The power input voltage between terminals 24V and COM on the MCB is within (24
VDC ± 15%).
3) The total lead-in wire gauge and total switch capacity meet the requirements.
- 79 -
Note
If the input voltage exceeds the allowable value, serious damage will be caused. Distinguish the
negative and positive of the DC power supply. Do not run the system when there is input power
phase loss.
4. Check the grounding.

1) Check that the resistance between the following points and the ground is close to
infinity.
‫ ־־‬R, S, T and PE
‫ ־־‬U, V, W and PE
‫ ־־‬24V and PE on the MCB
‫ ־־‬Motor U, V, W and PE
‫ ־־‬Encoder 15V, A, B, PGM and PE
‫ ־־‬+, – bus terminals and PE
‫ ־־‬Safety circuit, door lock circuit, and inspection circuit terminals and PE
2) Check the grounding terminals of all elevator electrical components and the power
supply of the control cabinet
5.1.2 Setting and Auto-tuning of Motor Parameters

The NICE3000new supports two major control modes, sensorless flux vector control (SFVC)
and closed-loop vector control (CLVC). SFVC is applicable to inspection speed running for
commissioning and fault judgment running during maintenance of the asynchronous motor.
CLVC is applicable to normal elevator running. In CLVC mode, good driving performance
and running efficiency can be achieved in the prerequisite of correct motor parameters.
■■ Motor Parameters to Be Set
The motor parameters that need to be set are listed in the following table.
Table 5-1 Motor parameters to be set
Function Code Parameter Name Description

0: Asynchronous motor
F1-25 Motor type
1: Synchronous motor
0: SIN/COS encoder
F1-00 Encoder type 1: UVW encoder
2: ABZ incremental encoder
F1-12 Encoder pulses per revolution 0–10000
- 80 -
Function Code Parameter Name Description

Rated motor power
Rated motor voltage These parameters are model dependent,
F1-01 to F1-05 Rated motor current and you need to manually input them
Rated motor frequency according to the nameplate.
Rated motor rotational speed
0: Sensorless flux vector control (SFVC)
F0-00 Control mode 1: Closed-loop vector control (CLVC)
2: Voltage/Frequency (V/F) control
0: Operation panel control
F0-01 Command source selection
1: Distance control
0: Pre-torque invalid
F8-01 Pre-torque selection 1: Load cell pre-torque compensation
2: Automatic pre-torque compensation
0: No operation
1: With-load auto-tuning
F1-11 Auto-tuning mode
2: No-load auto-tuning
3: Shaft auto-tuning
■■ Precautions for Motor Auto-tuning

Follow the following precautions:
•• Ensure that all wiring and installation meet the safety specifications.
•• Ensure that the motor wiring is correct (UVW cables of the motor respectively connected
to UVW cables of the controller) for with-load auto-tuning. If the motor wiring is incorrect,
the motor may jitter or fail to run after the brake is released; in this case, you need to
replace any two of the motor UVW cables.
•• Reset the current fault and then start auto-tuning, because the system cannot enter the
auto-tuning state ("TUNE" is not displayed) when there is a fault.
•• Perform motor auto-tuning again if the phase sequence or encoder of the synchronous
motor is changed.
•• For the synchronous motor, perform three or more times of auto-tuning, compare the
obtained values of F1-06 (Encoder initial angle). The value deviation of F1-06 shall be
within ±5°, which indicates that the auto-tuning is successful.
•• After the auto-tuning is completed, perform trial inspection running. Check whether the
current is normal, whether the actual running direction is the same as the set direction.
If the running direction is different from the set direction, change the value of F2-10.
•• With-load auto-tuning is dangerous (inspection-speed running of many control cabinets
is emergency electric running and the shaft safety circuit is shorted). Ensure that there
is no person in the shaft in this auto-tuning mode.
The following figure shows the motor auto-tuning process.
- 81 -
Figure 5-2 Motor auto-tuning process
Set F1-25 correctly based on

the actually used motor type
For with-load auto-tuning,

(Asynchronous With-load set F1-11 to 1. After the
motor) Set F0-01 to 0 auto-tuning operation panel displays
Set encoder parameters F1-00 "TUNE", press the RUN
(Operation panel
and F1-12 and motor parameters key. Static motor auto-
control)
F1-01 to F1-05 correctly tuning starts.
F1-25 = 1
(Synchronous motor)
No-load auto-
With-load auto-tuning No-load auto-tuning tuning
For no-load auto-tuning, set F1-11 After motor parameters F1-

F0-01 = 1 F0-01 = 0 to 2. The operation panel displays 14 to F1-18 are obtained,
F1-11 = 1 F1-11 = 2 "TUNE". Release the brake restore F0-01 to 1
manually and press the RUN key. (Distance control). Motor
Motor auto-tuning starts. auto-tuning is completed.
Check the initial angle and wiring mode After motor parameter values
of the encoder (F1-06 and F1-08) after (F1-06 to F1-08, F1-14, F1-19
For with-load auto-tuning, set F1-11 to to F1-20)) and current loop
1. After the operation panel displays motor auto-tuning. Perform motor auto-
tuning multiple times and ensure that parameters are obtained,
"TUNE", press the UP/DOWN button restore F0-01 to 1 (Distance
for inspection to start auto-tuning. The the difference between values of F1-06
is within 5° and values of F1-08 are the control). Motor auto-tuning is
motor starts to run. completed.
same.
More descriptions of motor auto-tuning are as follows:

a. When the NICE3000new drives the synchronous motor, an encoder is required to provide
feedback signals. You must set the encoder parameters correctly before performing
motor auto-tuning.
b. During synchronous motor auto-tuning, the motor needs to rotate. The best auto-tuning
mode is no-load auto-tuning; if this mode is impossible, then try with-load auto-tuning.
c. For synchronous motor, with-load auto-tuning learns stator resistance, shaft-D and
shaft-Q inductance, current loop (including zero servo) PI parameters, and encoder
initial angle; no-load auto-tuning additionally learns the encoder wiring mode.
d. For the asynchronous motor, static auto-tuning learns stator resistance, rotor
resistance, and leakage inductance, and automatically calculates the mutual inductance
and motor magnetizing current. Complete auto-tuning learns the mutual inductance,
motor magnetizing current, and current loop parameters are learned.
■■ Output State of RUN and Brake Contactors
For the sake of safety in different control modes, the system handles the output commands
to the RUN contactor or brake contactor differently. In some situations, it is necessary to
release the RUN contactor or the brake contactor manually
The following table lists the output state of the running and brake contactors.
- 82 -
Table 5-2 Output state of the running and brake contactors
With-load Auto-tuning Operation

Control mode No-load Auto- Distance
(F1-11 = 1) Panel
tuning Control
Control
(F1-11 = 2) Synchronous Asynchronous (F0-01 = 1)
Output State (F0-01 = 0)
motor Motor
RUN contactor Output Output Output Not output Output
Brake contactor Not output Output Not output Not output Output
5.1.3 Trial Running at Normal Speed

After ensuring that running at inspection speed is normal, perform shaft auto-tuning, and
then you can perform trial running at normal speed (the elevator satisfies the safety running
requirements).
To perform shaft auto-tuning, the following conditions must be satisfied:
1. The signals of the encoder and leveling sensors (NC, NO) are correct and the slow-
down switches are installed properly and act correctly.
2. When the elevator is at the bottom floor, the down slow-down 1 switch acts.
3. The elevator is in the inspection state. The control mode is distance control and CLVC
(F0-00 = 1, F0-01 = 1).
4. The top floor number (F6-00) and bottom floor number (F6-01) are set correctly.
STOP
5. The system is not in the fault alarm state. If there is a fault at the moment, press RES
to reset the fault.

Then set F1-11 to 3 on the operation panel or set F7 to 1 on the keypad of the MCB, and
start shaft auto-tuning.
Note
For shaft auto-tuning when there are only two floors, the elevator needs to run to below the bottom
leveling position, that is, the leveling sensor is disconnected from the leveling plate. There is no
such requirement when there are multiple floors.
5.1.4 Door Machine Commissioning

Correlation of the door machine controller and the elevator controller is that the CTB outputs
door open/close command and the door machine controller feeds back the door open/close
limit signal.
After commissioning and installation of the door machine are complete, check whether the
wiring is correct and whether the door open/close limit signals are consistent with the default
setting. To perform the door machine commissioning, do as follows:
1. In the terminal control mode of the door machine controller, manually short the door
open relay output terminal BM/B1 and the door close relay output terminal BM/B2 on
the CTB, and observe whether the door machine can open and close correspondingly.
- 83 -
If the door machine cannot act properly, check whether BM/B1 and BM/B2 are
wrongly connected to the input terminals of the door machine controller and whether
commissioning of the door machine controller is complete.
2. After ensuring that control of door open/close is normal, check whether the door open/
close signal feedback from the door machine is normal.
a. Check the NO/NC states of the door input signals by observing the input indicators on
the CTB, as listed in the following table.
Table 5-3 NO/NC state of the door input signals
NO Input Signal NC Input Signal

Door
Signal Input Point F5-25 F5-25
State Indicator State Indicator State
Setting Setting
Door open X3 (door open limit 1) Bit2 = 1 When the Bit2 = 0

When the signal
limit signal is
X4 (door open limit 2) is active, the Bit4 = 1 Bit4 = 0
active, the
corresponding
X5 (door close limit 1) Bit3 = 1 corresponding Bit3 = 0
Door input indicator
input indicator
close limit X6 (door close limit 2) is ON. Bit5 = 1 Bit5 = 0
is OFF.
For details on the setting of F5-25, see the description of F5-25 in Chapter 7.
b. Check whether the door open/close limit signal received by the system is correct.
As shown in the following figure which is part of display of parameter F5-35 on the
operation panel, segments E and C of the upmost right 7-segment LED are the
monitoring points of door open limit and door close limit.
‫ ־־‬Segment C ON, segment E OFF: The system receives the door open limit signal and
the door is in the open state.
‫ ־־‬Segment E ON, segment C OFF: The system receives the door close limit signal and
the door is in the close state.
The two segments should be OFF in the door open/close process.
Control the door to the open or close state manually and view the value of F5-35. If the
following screen is displayed, it indicates that the door machine controller feeds back
the correct door open and close signals.
Figure 5-3 Door open and close limit monitoring signals
5 4 3 2 1
A
F B
G
E C Door 1 open limit
D DP
F B
G
E C Door 1 close limit
D DP
- 84 -
5.1.5 Riding Comfort

The riding comfort is an important factor of the elevator's overall performance. Improper
installation of mechanical parts and improper parameter settings will cause bad comfort.
Enhancing the riding comfort mainly involves adjustment of the controller output and the
elevator's mechanical construction.
■■ Controller Output
The parameters that may influence the riding comfort are described in this part.
Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Description
Code
It can reduce the lower-
Current filter time
F1-09 0.00–40.00 0.00 frequency vertical jitter during
(synchronous motor)
running.
Increasing the value can
F1-18 Magnetizing current 0.01–300.00 0.00 A improve the loading capacity of
the asynchronous motor.
Speed loop proportional
F2-00 0–100 40 F2-00 and F2-01 are the PI
gain KP1
regulation parameters when
Speed loop integral the running frequency is
F2-01 0.01–10.00s 0.60s
time TI1 lower than F2-02 (Switchover
frequency 1). F2-03 and
F2-02 Switchover frequency 1 0.00 to F2-05 2.00 Hz
F2-04 are the PI regulation
Speed loop proportional parameters when the running
F2-03 0–100 35
gain KP2 frequency is higher than F2-
02 (Switchover frequency 2).
Speed loop integral
F2-04 0.01–10.00s 0.80s The regulation parameters
time TI2
between F2-02 and F2-04 are
the weighted average value
F2-05 Switchover frequency 2 F2-02 to F0-06 5.00 Hz of F2-00 & F2-01 and F2-03 &
F2-04.
For a faster system response, increase the proportional gain and reduce the integral time.
Be aware that a fast system response causes system oscillation.
The recommended regulating method is as follows:
If the default setting cannot satisfy the requirements, make slight regulation. Increase the
proportional gain first to the largest value under which the system does not oscillate. Then
decrease the integral time to ensure fast responsiveness and small overshoot.
If both F2-02 (Switchover frequency 1) and F2-05 (Switchover frequency 2) are set to 0,
only F2-03 and F2-04 are valid.
Function Setting
Parameter Name Default Description
Code Range
F2-06 Current loop proportional gain 10–500 60 F2-06 and F2-07 are the
current loop adjustment
parameters in the vector
F2-07 Current loop integral gain 10–500 30
control algorithm.
- 85 -
The optimum values of these two parameters are obtained during motor auto-tuning, and
you need not modify them. Appropriate setting of the parameters can restrain jitter during
running and have obvious effect on the riding comfort.
Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Description
Code
Startup acceleration
F2-18 0.000–1.500s 0.000s
time
It can reduce the terrace
F3-00 Startup speed 0.000–0.030 m/s 0.000 m/s feeling at startup caused by the
breakout friction of the guide
rail.
F3-01 Startup holding time 0.000–0.500s 0.000s
It specifies the zero speed

Zero-speed control
F3-18 0.000–1.000s 0.200s holding time before brake
time at startup
output.
It specifies the time required
from when the system outputs
F3-19 Brake release delay 0.000–1.000s 0.200s
the open signal to when the
brake is completely released.
It specifies the zero speed
Zero-speed control
F3-20 0.200–1.500s 0.200s holding time after the brake is
time at end
applied.
It specifies the time from when
the system outputs the brake
F8-11 Brake apply delay 0.000–1.000s 0.600s
applying signal to when the
brake is completely applied.
Figure 5-4 Running time sequence
V (speed) F3-20
F3-19 F8-11
F3-18 F2-17
RUN contactor t (time)

Brake contactor
Shorting door lock
circuit contactor
Shorting motor
stator contactor
Internal
running status
Leveling signal
RUN contactor feedback
Brake contactor feedback

Shorting door lock circuit
contactor feedback
Shorting motor stator
contactor feedback
- 86 -
The release time of the brakes varies according to the types and the response time of the
brakes is greatly influenced by the ambient temperature. A high brake coil temperature
slows the brake responsiveness. Thus, when the riding comfort at startup or stop cannot
be improved by adjusting zero servo or load cell compensation parameters, appropriately
increase the values of F3-19 and F3-20 to check whether the brake release time influences
the riding comfort.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Remarks

1: Load cell pre-torque Set this parameter
Pre-torque
F8-01 compensation 0 based on actual
selection
2: Automatic pre-torque requirement.
compensation
Zero servo current These are zero-
F2-11 0.20%–50.0% 15.0%
coefficient servo regulating
parameters when
Zero servo speed
F2-12 0.00–2.00 0.50 F8-01 is set to
loop KP
2 (Automatic
Zero servo speed pre-torque
F2-13 0.00–2.00 0.60
loop KI compensation).
When F8-01 is set to 2 (Automatic pre-torque compensation), the system automatically

adjusts the compensated torque at startup.
a. Gradually increase F2-11 (Zero servo current coefficient) until that the rollback is
cancelled at brake release and the motor does not vibrate.
b. Increase the value of F2-11 (Zero servo current coefficient) if the motor jitters when F2-
13 (Zero servo speed loop TI) is less than 1.00.
c. Motor vibration and acoustic noise indicate excessive value of F2-12 (Zero servo speed
loop KP). Use the default value of F2-12.
d. If the motor noise is large at no-load-cell startup, decrease the values of the zero servo
current loop parameters (F2-14 and F2-15).
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Remarks

F8-02 Pre-torque offset 0.0%–100.0% 50.0%
These are pre-torque
F8-03 Drive gain 0.00–2.00 0.60
regulating parameters.
F8-04 Brake gain 0.00–2.00 0.60
When F8-01 is set to 1 (Load cell pre-torque compensation), the system with a load cell pre-
outputs the torque matched the load to ensure the riding comfort of the elevator.
•• Motor driving state: full-load up, no-load down
•• Motor braking state: full-load down, no-load up
"Pre-torque offset" is actually the elevator balance coefficient, namely, the percentage of the
car load to the rated load when the car and counterweight are balanced.
"Drive gain" or "Brake gain" scales the elevator’s present pre-torque coefficient when the
motor runs at the drive or brake side. If the gain set is higher, then the calculated value of
- 87 -
startup pro-torque compensation is higher. The controller identifies the braking or driving
state according to the load cell signal and automatically calculates the required torque
compensation value.
When an analog device is used to measure the load, these parameters are used to adjust
the elevator startup. The method of adjusting the startup is as follows:
•• In the driving state, increasing the value of F8-03 could reduce the rollback during the
elevator startup, but a very high value could cause car lurch at start.
•• In the braking state, increasing the value of F8-04 could reduce the jerk in command
direction during the elevator startup, but a very high value could cause car lurch at start.
■■ Mechanical Construction
The mechanical construction affecting the riding comfort involves installation of the guide
rail, guide shoe, steel rope, and brake, balance of the car, and the resonance caused by the
car, guild rail and motor. For asynchronous motor, abrasion or improper installation of the
gearbox may arouse bad riding comfort.
1. Installation of the guide rail mainly involves the verticality and surface flatness of the
guide rail, smoothness of the guide rail connection and parallelism between two guide
rails (including guide rails on the counterweight side).
2. Tightness of the guide shoes (including the one on the counterweight side) also
influences the riding comfort. The guide shoes must not be too loose or tight.
3. The drive from the motor to the car totally depends on the steel rope. Large flexibility of
the steel rope with irregular resistance during the car running may cause curly oscillation
of the car. In addition, unbalanced stress of multiple steel ropes may cause the car to
jitter during running.
4. The riding comfort during running may be influenced if the brake arm is installed too
tightly or released incompletely.
5. If the car weight is unbalanced, it will cause uneven stress of the guide shoes that
connect the car and the guide rail. As a result, the guide shoes will rub with the guide
rail during running, affecting the riding comfort.
6. For asynchronous motor, abrasion or improper installation of the gearbox may also
affect the riding comfort.
7. Resonance is an inherent character of a physical system, related to the material
and quality of system components. If you are sure that the oscillation is caused by
resonance, reduce the resonance by increasing or decreasing the car weight or
counterweight and adding resonance absorbers at connections of the components (for
example, place rubber blanket under the motor).
5.1.6 Password Setting

The NICE3000new provides the parameter password protection function. Here gives an
example of changing the password into 12345 ( indicates the blinking digit), as shown in
the following figure.
- 88 -
Figure 5-5 Example of changing the password
Status parameter
(default display)
PRG PRG
0.000 F0 FP ENTER PRG
PRG
FP-00 FP-01
ENTER
PRG 00000
If there is a blinking digit, press
/ / to modify the digit.
12345 ENTER
To save the
setting
•• After you set the user password (set FP-00 to a non-zero value), the system requires
user password authentication (the system displays "------") when you press PRG. In this
case, you can modify the function code parameters only after entering the password
correctly.
•• For factory parameters (group FF), you also need to enter the factory password.
•• Do not try to modify the factory parameters. If these parameters are set improperly, the
system may be unstable or abnormal.
•• In the password protection unlocked state, you can change the password at any time.
The last input number will be the user password.
•• If you want to disable the password protection function, enter the correct password
and then set FP-00 to 0. If FP-00 is a non-zero value at power-on, the parameters are
protected by the password.
•• Remember the password you set. Otherwise, the system cannot be unlocked.
5.2 System Application
5.2.1 Emergency Evacuation at Power Failure

Passengers may be trapped in the car if power failure suddenly happens during the use of
the elevator. The emergency evacuation function at power failure is designed to solve the
problem.
The emergency evacuation function is implemented in the following two modes:
•• Uninterrupted power supply (UPS)
•• Shorting PMSM stator
The two modes are described in detailed in the following part.
■■ Emergency Evacuation 220 V UPS
In this scheme, the 220 V UPS provides power supply to the main unit and the drive control
circuit. The following figure shows the emergency evacuation 220 V UPS circuit.
- 89 -
Figure 5-6 Emergency evacuation 220 V UPS circuit

UPC
R
21 22
N
61 62
(6 A) Transformer
UPS-220 V
1 2
220 VAC
MCB
UPC
Y6 M6
A1 A2 220 VAC 115 VAC
Safety circuit 21 22
UPC (6 A) 115 VDC

UPS-0 V
3 4
R
5 6
S
T
NICE3000new
13 14
Note
The UPS emergency evacuation signal can be output only by Y6.
The following figure shows various contacts of the contactors.

Figure 5-7 Various contacts of the contactors
Phase sequence relay
UPC Safety contactor
Safety circuit 110 V 0V
11 14 71 72 A1 A2
UPC
53 54
UPC
Emergency
24 V X20
feedback 21 22
2 4 6 14 22 54 62 72 82
UPC
1 3 5 13 21 53 61 71 81
The UPS power is recommended in the following table.

Table 5-4 Recommended UPS power for each power class
UPS Power Controller Power

1 kVA (700–800 W) P ≤ 5.5 kW
2 kVA (1400–1600 W) 5.5 kW < P ≤ 11 kW
3 kVA (2100–2400 W) 15 kW ≤ P ≤ 22 kW
- 90 -
The following table lists the setting of the related parameters.

Table 5-5 Parameter setting under the 220 V UPS scheme
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range
Emergency evacuation switching

F6-48 0.010–0.630 m/s
speed
F6-49 Evacuation parking floor 0 to F6-01
Emergency evacuation operation
F8-09 0.05 m/s
speed at power failure
0: Invalid
Emergency evacuation operation 1: UPS
F8-10
mode at power failure 2: 48 V battery power
supply
F5-20 (X20) X20 function selection 59 (UPS valid signal)
13 (Emergency evacuation
F5-31 (Y6) Y6 function selection
automatic switchover)
■■ Shorting PMSM Stator

Shorting PMSM stator means shorting phases UVW of the PMSM, which produces
resistance to restrict movement of the elevator car. In field application, an auxiliary NC
contact is usually added to the NO contact of the output contactor to short PMSM UVW
phases to achieve the effect. It is feasible in theory but may cause over-current actually.
Due to the poor quality of the contactor and the wiring of adding the auxiliary contact, the
residual current of the controller is still high when the outputs UVW are shorted at abnormal
stop. This results in an over-current fault and may damage the controller or motor.
Monarch's shorting PMSM stator scheme requires the installation of an independent
contactor for shorting PMSM stator. The shorting PMSM stator function is implemented via
the relay NC contact. On the coil circuit of the RUN contactor, an NO contact of the shorting
PMSM stator contactor is connected in serial, to ensure that output short-circuit does not
occur when the parameter setting is incorrect.
The following figure shows wiring of the independent shorting PMSM stator contactor.
- 91 -
Figure 5-8 Wiring of the independent shorting PMSM stator contactor

24V
Braking resistor
1 2 FX
X18
3 4
Safety contactor
CN1
X18
R + – PB 1 2 Motor
U
Three-phase SW
S
AC power V M
supply T 3 4
W
NICE3000new 5 6
Encoder
PG card
MCTC-PG Shielding layer
FX
Y1
SW
Y1
M1 M1 5 6 Safety circuit
Y2
M2
Y3
CN7 M3
Y4
M4 Y3
Y5
M5
FX
Y6
M6
M3 110 VAC
FX: Shorting PMSM stator contactor

SW: RUN contactor
The parameter setting in such wiring mode is described in the following table.
Table 5-6 Parameter setting under the shorting PMSM stator scheme
Function
Parameter Name Value Description
Code
Allocate X18 with "Input of shorting PMSM
F5-18 X18 function selection 30
stator feedback signal".
Allocate Y3 with "Output of shorting PMSM
F5-28 Y3 function selection 12
stator contactor feedback signal".
FE-33 Bit8 0 Use an NC shorting motor stator contactor.
More details on the emergency evacuation setting are provided in F6-45, as listed in the
following table.
Table 5-7 Parameter description of F6-45
Function
Bit Binary Setting Remarks
Description
If the torque
Load
Bit0 0 0 direction 1 direction is
Direction
automatically
Direction Automatically determining of
calculated, the no-
determine calculating (based on nearest
load-cell function
mode the direction load cell landing
must be enabled,
Bit1 0 1 data or half- 0 floor
that is, F8-01 is set
load signal)
to 2.
- 92 -
Function
Description
1 Stop at the base floor -

Bit2 Stop position
0 Stop at nearest landing floor -
Door open at 1 Stop and open door at a single leveling signal -

Bit3 single leveling
signal 0 Normal leveling stop -
When it is set
that the torque
direction is
Startup Startup torque compensation valid in automatically
Bit4 1
compensation emergency evacuation running calculated,
enable automatic
startup torque
compensation.
This function
is invalid when
Emergency the function of
If the elevator does not arrive at the required
evacuation switching over
Bit8 1 floor after 50s emergency evacuation running
running time shorting stator
time, Err31 is reported.
protection braking mode to
controller drive is
used.
Emergency The buzzer output is active during UPS

Bit10 1 -
buzzer output emergency evacuation running.
Bit11 Reserved 0 - -
Shorting stator
braking mode
Enable the function of switching over the
Bit12 switched over 1 -
shorting stator braking mode to controller drive.
to controller
drive
If the speed is still
lower than the
value set in F6-48
after the elevator
1 Speed setting is in shorting stator
Mode of braking mode for
shorting stator 10s, the controller
braking mode starts to drive the
Bit13
switched over elevator.
to controller
drive If the time of the
shorting stator
braking mode
0 Time setting
exceeds 50s, the
controller starts to
drive the elevator.
- 93 -
Function
Description
Emergency 1 Exit at door close limit -

Bit14 evacuation
exit mode 0 Exit at door open limit -
When this function

Function
is enabled, the
selection of
Bit15 1 Enable this function. setting of related
shorting stator
function codes
braking mode
becomes effective.
5.2.2 Parallel Control of Two Elevators

The NICE3000new supports parallel control of two elevators, which is implemented by using
the CANbus communication port for information exchange and processing between the two
elevators. The NICE3000new also supports group control of three to eight elevators if a group
control board is used. This implements coordination between multiple elevators to respond
to hall calls and improves the elevator use efficiency.
The NICE3000new is compatible with the NICE3000 and NICE5000. This section describes
the use of two elevators in parallel control. For use of multiple elevators in group control,
refer to the description of the group control board or contact Monarch.
■■ Communication Ports for Parallel Control
The following table lists the parameter setting of parallel control.
Table 5-8 Parameter setting of parallel control by means of communication ports
Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Setting in Parallel Control
Code
Number of elevators
F6-07 1–8 2
in group mode
Master elevator: 1
F6-08 Elevator No. 1–8
Slave elevator: 2
Bit2: Parallel Bit2 = 1 when CN5 of the

implemented at RS232 communication port is
monitoring port used for parallel control
Bit3: Parallel Bit3 = 1 when CN4 of the CAN2
Program control
F6-09 implemented at communication port is used for
selection 2
CAN2 parallel control
Bit4: Parallel control Bit4 = 1 when the NICE3000
in compatibility with is involved in parallel/group
NICE3000 control
Note
By default, the CAN1 communication port is used for parallel control by default. Therefore, you
need not select the parallel control port.
When the CAN2 communication port is used for parallel control, you need not set the CTB address
- 94 -
switch.
■■ Parallel Control by Using CAN1 (Terminal CN3)

When the CAN1 communication port (CN3 terminal) is used for parallel control, you need to
set the CTB addresses, according to the following table.
Table 5-9 Address and jumper setting of the CTB for CAN1 is used for parallel control
CTB Jumper Setting Address Setting
CTB of elevator 1# J2 CTB of master elevator

ON OFF
CTB of elevator 2# J2 CTB of slave elevator

ON OFF
Figure 5-9 Wiring when CAN1 is used for parallel control
Elevator Elevator
NICE3000new 1# NICE3000new 2#
CN3 CN7 CN3 CN7

MOD+
MOD+
CAN+
CAN+
MOD-
MOD-
CAN-
CAN-
COM
COM
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
M1
M2
M3
M4
M5
M6
24V
24V
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Y5
Y6
CAN1 cables for
parallel control
Elevator Elevator
1# 2#
24V
CTB 24V CTB
CAN+ CAN+
CAN- MCTC-CTB CAN- MCTC-CTB
COM COM
CN2 CN2
Up button indicator
HCB 24V
MOD+
HCB 24V
MOD+
MCTC-HCB MOD-
COM MCTC-HCB MOD-
COM
Up button
1 1 1 1
2
3 JP1 JP3 2 2 JP3 JP1 23
3 3
4 4 4 4
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 JP2 JP4 3 3 JP4 JP2 3
4 4 4 4
Down button
Down button indicator
■■ Parallel Control by Using CAN2 (Terminal CN4)

This mode can be implemented by directly connecting the CN4 terminals of two elevators
and setting related parameters of group F6. You need not set the CTB addresses.
- 95 -
Figure 5-10 Wiring when CAN2 is used for parallel control
Elevator Elevator
NICE3000new 1#
CAN2 cables for NICE3000new 2#
CN4 parallel control CN4
CAN2+ CAN2+
CAN2- CAN2-
CN3 GND GND

CN3
MOD+
MOD+
CAN+
CAN+
MOD-
MOD-
CAN-
CAN-
COM
COM
24V
24V
Elevator Elevator
1# 2#
24V
CTB 24V CTB
CAN+ CAN+
CAN- MCTC-CTB CAN- MCTC-CTB
COM COM
CN2 CN2
Up button indicator
HCB 24V
MOD+
HCB 24V
MOD+
MCTC-HCB MOD-
COM MCTC-HCB MOD-
COM
Up button
1 1 1 1
2
3 JP1 JP3 2 2 JP3 JP1 23
3 3
4 4 4 4
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 JP4 2
3 JP2 JP4 3 3 JP2 3
4 4 4 4
Down button
■■ Parallel Control by Using RS232 (Terminal CN5)

When CANbus communication is applied for parallel control, if the 24 V power voltages of
two systems are different or the external interference is severe, the communication effect
is affected. To achieve better communication effect in parallel mode, we adopt RS485 at
terminal CN5 of the monitoring port on the MCB for communication of the parallel mode.
In this case, the RS232 communication signal needs to be converted to RS485
communication signal. Thus, two optical-isolated RS232/RS485 converters (model: U485A)
are required.
The following figure shows the wiring of parallel control implemented at the RS232
monitoring port.
- 96 -
Figure 5-11 Wiring of parallel control implemented at the monitoring port
RS232-RS485 converter RS232-RS485 converter

D+ D+
D- D-
B
RS485 cables for
parallel control
Elevator Elevator
1# NICE3000new CN5 CN5
NICE3000new 2#
CN3 CN3
MOD+
MOD+
CAN+
CAN+
MOD-
MOD-
CAN-
CAN-
COM
COM
24V
24V
Elevator Elevator
1# 2#
24V CTB 24V
CTB
CAN+ CAN+
CAN- MCTC-CTB CAN-
CO MCTC-CTB
COM
M
CN2 CN2
Up button indicator
HCB 24V
MOD+
HCB 24V
MOD+
MCTC-HCB MOD-
COM MCTC-HCB MOD-
COM
Up button
1 1 1 1
2
3 JP1 JP3 2 2 JP3 JP1 23
3 3
4 4 4 4
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 JP4 2
3 JP2 JP4 3 3 JP2 3
4 4 4 4
Down button
■■ Setting of Physical Floors

Physical floors, relative to the NICE control system, are defined by the installation position
of the leveling plate. The floor (such as the ground floor) at which the lowest leveling plate is
installed corresponds to physical floor 1. The top physical floor is the accumulative number
of the leveling plates. In parallel mode, the physical floor numbers of the same floor for two
elevators are consistent.
If the floor structures of two elevators are different, physical floors should start with the floor
with the lowest position. The physical floors at the overlapped area of the two elevators are
the same. Even if one elevator does not stop a floor in the overlapped area, a leveling plate
should be installed there. You can make the elevator not stop at the floor by setting service
floors.
- 97 -
When two elevators are in parallel mode, the addresses of the HCBs should be set
according to physical floors. Parallel running can be implemented only when the HCB
address set for one elevator is the same as that for the other elevator in terms of the same
floor.
Note
In parallel mode, the top floor (F6-00) and bottom floor (F6-01) of the elevators should be set
based on corresponding physical floors.
Assume that there are two elevators in parallel mode. Elevator 1 stops at floor B1, floor 1,
floor 2, and floor 3, while elevator 2 stops at floor 1, floor 3, and floor 4. Now, you need to
set related parameters and HCB addresses according to the following table.
Table 5-10 Parameter setting and HCB addresses of two elevators
Elevator 1 Elevator 2
Number of elevators in
2 2
group mode
Elevator No. 1 2
Physical HCB
Actual floor HCB display HCB address HCB display
floor address
B1 1 1 FE-01 = 1101
1 2 2 FE-02 = 1901 2 FE-02 = 1901
Non-stop floor
2 3 3 FE-03 = 1902 but leveling FE-03 = 1902
plate required
3 4 4 FE-04 = 1903 4 FE-04 = 1903
4 5 5 FE-05 = 1904
Bottom floor
1 2
(F6-01)
Top floor (F6-00) 4 5
65531 (not stop at physical floor
Service floor (F6-05) 65535
3)
- 98 -
5.2.3 Opposite Door Control

Set related parameters according to the following table.
Table 5-11 Parameter setting for opposite door control
Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default
Code
Bit2: JP16 input used as back door selection
0
(button)
Bit3: JP16 input used as the back door open
0
signal
Program control Bit4: Opening only one door of opposite doors

F6-40 0
selection 1 under manual control
Bit13: Folding command used as disability
0
function (= 1) and back door function (= 0)
Bit14: Car call command folding 0
Bit15: JP20 used for switchover to back door 0
Start address of
F8-16 hall call auxiliary 0–40 0
command
Number of door
FB-00 1–2 1
machine(s)
Elevator function
FE-33 Bit15: Opposite door independent control 0
selection 2
- 99 -
Table 5-12 Selection of the opposite door mode
Opposite
Parameter Setting Function Description Use Method
Door Mode
Old mode (same as the NICE3000)
The front door and back The hall call
FC-04 = 0
door acts simultaneously addresses of the
Mode 1 (Simultaneous
upon arrival for hall calls front door are set
control)
and car calls. based on floor (1-
The corresponding door 15). The hall call
opens upon arrival for hall addresses of the
FC-04 = 1 (Hall call back door are set
calls from this door. The
Mode 2 independent, car based on floor +16
front door and back door
call simultaneous) (17-31).
act simultaneously upon
arrival for car calls. Two CCBs are
FE-33
The corresponding door connected in serial.
Bit15 = 1;
opens upon arrival for halls The car calls of
Fb-00 = 2 the front door are
call from this door. Upon
FC-04 = 2 (Hall call controlled by JP1
arrival for car calls, the
Mode 3 independent, car to JP15 of CCB1,
door to open is selected
call manual control) and the car calls of
between the front door and
back door by using the door the back door are
switchover switch. controlled by JP1 to
JP15 of CCB2.
The corresponding door
FC-04 = 3 (Hall call
opens upon arrival for halls
Mode 4 independent, car A maximum of 15
call and car calls from this
call independent) floors are supported.
door.
New mode
The front door and back
FC-04 = 0
door act simultaneously
Mode 1 (Simultaneous The hall call
upon arrival for hall calls
control) addresses of the
and car calls.
front door are set
The corresponding door based on floor (1-
opens upon arrival for hall N). The hall call
calls from this door. The addresses of the
Mode 2 independent, car
front door and back door back door are set
call simultaneous)
Fb-00 = 2 act simultaneously upon based on floor (N+1
arrival for car calls. to 40).
F8-16 = The corresponding door
N (N > opens upon arrival for halls The front door CCB
current call from this door. Upon is connected to CN7
top floor arrival for car calls, the of the CTB, and the
Mode 3 independent, car
door to open is selected back door CCB is
call manual control)
between the front door and connected to CN8 of
back door by using the door the CTB.
switchover switch.
The corresponding door
FC-04 = 3 (Hall call A maximum of 20
opens upon arrival for halls
Mode 4 independent, car floors are supported.
call and car calls from this
call independent)
door.
- 100 -
Note
In the fire emergency, inspection or re-leveling state, the opposite door is under simultaneous
control rather than independent control.
5.2.4 VIP Function Description

The NICE3000new provides the VIP function that the elevator first directly runs to the VIP
floor and provides services for special persons. After the system enters the VIP state,
current car calls and halls are cleared; door open or close needs to be controlled manually;
the elevator does not respond to hall calls.
Here gives an example to explain how to use the VIP function and set the VIP floor.
Assume that there are floors 1 to 20 for the elevator, and floor 8 is set as the VIP floor.
Table 5-13 Parameter setting of the VIP function
Function Parameter
Setting Range Value Remarks
Code Name
Top floor of They are used to set the top
F6-00 F6-01 to 40 20
the elevator floor and bottom floor of the
Bottom elevator, determined by the
F6-01 floor of the 1 to F6-00 1 number of actually installed
elevator leveling plates.
F6-12 VIP floor 0 to F6-00 8 Set floor 8 as the VIP floor.

Elevator
FE-32 function Bit9: VIP function Bit9 = 1 The VIP service is enabled.
selection 1
0: Reserved
HCB:JP1 NO/NC input:

Fd-07 1/33: Elevator lock signal 4 These parameters are used
input
2/34: Fire emergency signal to set the functions of pins 2
and 3 of JP1 and JP2 on the
3/35: Current floor forbidden HCB. The setting is effective
4/36: VIP floor signal to the HCBs for all floors.
HCB:JP2 5/37: Security floor signal
Fd-08 4
input
6/38: Door close button
input
Bit0: VIP enabled by hall The VIP function is enabled
Bit0 = 1
call (at VIP floor) at a hall call.
After the hall call input for
Bit1: VIP enabled by
Bit1 = 1 the VIP function is active, the
terminal
VIP function system enters the VIP state.
F6-46
selection
Bit2 to Bit7: Reserved - -
If this function is enabled,

Bit8: Number of VIP car
Bit8 = 1 only one car call is supported
calls limited
in the VIP state.
- 101 -
When there is a hall call at the VIP floor, the system automatically enters the VIP state. After
the VIP input terminal is ON, the elevator returns to the VIP floor to provide the VIP service.
The VIP running times is limited by bit8 of F6-46. If bit8 is set to 1, the elevator responds to
only one car call (the last one); after arriving at the floor required by the car call, the elevator
automatically exits the VIP state. If bit8 is set to 0, the number of car calls is not limited.
The elevator automatically exits the VIP state if it does not enter the car call running within
30s after each time stop or after it executes all car calls. If there is no car call 30s after the
elevator enters the VIP state, the elevator automatically exits the VIP state.
- 102 -
6
Function Code Table
Function Code Table NICE3000new User Manual
Chapter 6 Function Code Table
6.1 Function Code Description

1. There are a total of 18 function code groups, each of which includes several function
codes. The function codes adopt the three-level menu. The function code group number
is Level-I menu; the function code number is Level-II menu; the function code setting is
Level-III menu.
2. The meaning of each column in the function code table is as follows:
Function Code Indicates the function code number.
Indicates the parameter name of the function

Parameter Name
code.
Setting Range Indicates the setting range of the parameter.
Indicates the default setting of the parameter at

Default
factory.
Unit Indicates the measurement unit of the parameter.
Indicates whether the parameter can be modified

Property
(including the modification conditions)
The modification property of the parameters includes three types, described as follows:
"☆": The parameter can be modified when the controller is in either stop or running state.
"★": The parameter cannot be modified when the controller is in the running state.
"●": The parameter is the actually measured value and cannot be modified.
The system automatically restricts the modification property of all parameters to prevent
mal-function.
6.2 Function Code Groups
On the LED operation panel, press PRG and then or , and you can view
the function code groups. The function code groups are classified as follows:
- 104 -
NICE3000new User Manual Function Code Table
F0 Basic parameters F9 Time parameters

F1 Motor parameters FA Keypad setting parameters
F2 Vector control parameters Fb Door function parameters
F3 Running control parameters FC Protection function parameters
F4 Floor parameters Fd Communication parameters
F5 Terminal function parameters FE Elevator function parameters
F6 Basic elevator parameters FF Factory parameters
F7 Test function parameters FP User parameters
F8 Enhanced function parameters Fr Leveling adjustment parameters
6.3 Function Code Table

Function
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code
Group F0: Basic parameters
0: Sensorless flux vector
control (SFVC)
1: Closed-loop vector
F0-00 Control mode 1 - ★
control (CLVC)
2: Voltage/Frequency (V/
F) control
0: Operation panel
Command source control
F0-01 1 - ★
selection
1: Distance control
Running speed under
F0-02 0.050 to F0-04 0.050 m/s ☆
operation panel control
Maximum running
F0-03 0.100 to F0-04 1.600 m/s ★
speed
F0-04 Rated elevator speed 0.250–4.000 1.600 m/s ★
F0-05 Rated elevator load 300–9999 1000 kg ★
F0-06 Maximum frequency 20.00–99.00 50.00 Hz ★
F0-07 Carrier frequency 0.5–16.0 6.0 kHz ★
Group F1: Motor parameters
0: SIN/COS encoder
1: UVW encoder
F1-00 Encoder type 0 - ★
2: ABZ incremental
encoder
Model
F1-01 Rated motor power 0.7–75.0 kW ★
dependent
Model
F1-02 Rated motor voltage 0–600 V ★
dependent
- 105 -
Function
Code
Model
F1-03 Rated motor current 0.00–655.00 A ★
dependent
F1-04 Rated motor frequency 0.00–99.00 50.00 Hz ★
Rated motor rotational
F1-05 0–3000 1460 RPM ★
speed
Encoder initial angle Degree
F1-06 0.0–359.9 0 ★
(synchronous motor) (°)
Encoder angle
Degree
F1-07 at power-off 0.0–359.9 0 ★
(°)
(synchronous motor)
Synchronous motor
F1-08 0–15 0 - ★
wiring mode
Current filter time
F1-09 0–40 0 - ★
(synchronous motor)
Encoder verification
F1-10 0–65535 0 - ★
selection
0: No operation
F1-11 Auto-tuning mode 0 - ★
Encoder pulses per
F1-12 0–10000 2048 PPR ★
revolution
Encoder wire-breaking
F1-13 0–10.0 1.0 s ★
detection time
Stator resistance Model
F1-14 0.000–30.000 Ω ★
(asynchronous motor) dependent
Rotor resistance Model
F1-15 0.000–30.000 Ω ★
Leakage inductance Model
F1-16 0.00–300.00 mH ★
Mutual inductance Model
F1-17 0.1–3000.0 mH ★
Magnetizing current Model
F1-18 0.01–300.00 A ★
Shaft Q inductance
F1-19 0.00–650.00 3.00 mH ★
(torque)
Shaft D inductance
F1-20 0.00–650.00 3.00 mH ★
(excitation)
F1-21 Back EMF 0–65535 0 - ★
F1-25 Motor type 1 - ★
- 106 -
Function
Code
Group F2: Vector control parameters
Speed loop
F2-00 0–100 40 - ★
proportional gain KP1
Speed loop integral
F2-01 0.01–10.00 0.60 s ★
time TI1
Switchover frequency
F2-02 0.00 to F2-05 2.00 Hz ★
1
Speed loop
F2-03 0–100 35 - ★
proportional gain KP2
Speed loop integral
F2-04 0.01–10.00 0.80 s ★
time TI2
Switchover frequency
F2-05 F2-02 to F0-06 5.00 Hz ★
2
Current loop KP1
F2-06 10–500 60 - ★
(torque)
Current loop KI1
F2-07 10–500 30 - ★
(torque)
F2-08 Torque upper limit 0.0–200.0 150.0 % ★
0: Running direction and
position pulse direction
unchanged
1: Running direction
reversed, position pulse
Elevator running direction reversed
F2-10 0 - ★
direction 2: Running direction
unchanged, position
pulse direction reversed
3: Running direction
reversed, position pulse
direction unchanged
Zero servo current
F2-11 0.20–50.0 15 - ★
coefficient
Zero servo speed loop
F2-12 0.00–2.00 0.5 - ★
KP
Zero servo speed loop
F2-13 0.00–2.00 0.6 - ★
KI
Torque acceleration
F2-16 1–500 1 ms ★
time
Torque deceleration
F2-17 1–500 350 ms ★
time
Startup acceleration
F2-18 0.000–1.500 0.000 s ★
time
- 107 -
Function
Code
Group F3: Running control parameters
F3-00 Startup speed 0.000–0.030 0.000 m/s ★
F3-01 Startup holding time 0.000–0.500 0.000 s ★
F3-02 Acceleration rate 0.200–2.000 0.600 m/s2 ★
Acceleration start jerk
F3-03 0.300–4.000 2.500 s ★
time
Acceleration end jerk
F3-04 0.300–4.000 2.500 s ★
time
F3-05 Deceleration rate 0.200–2.000 0.600 m/s2 ★
Deceleration end jerk
F3-06 0.300–4.000 2.500 s ★
time
Deceleration start jerk
F3-07 0.300–4.000 2.500 s ★
time
Special deceleration
F3-08 0.500–2.000 0.900 m/s2 ★
rate
Pre-deceleration
F3-09 0–90.0 0.0 mm ★
distance
F3-10 Re-leveling speed 0.000–0.080 0.040 m/s ★
F3-11 Inspection speed 0.100–0.630 0.250 m/s ★
Position of up slow-
F3-12 0.000–300.00 0.00 m ★
down 1
Position of down slow-
F3-13 0.000–300.00 0.00 m ★
down 1
F3-14 0.000–300.00 0.00 m ★
down 2
F3-15 0.000–300.00 0.00 m ★
down 2
F3-16 0.000–300.00 0.00 m ★
down 3
F3-17 0.000–300.00 0.00 m ★
down 3
Zero-speed control
F3-18 0.000–1.000 0.200 s ★
time at startup
F3-19 Brake release delay 0.000–1.000 0.600 s ★
Zero-speed control
F3-20 0.200–1.500 0.200 s ★
time at end
Low-speed re-leveling
F3-21 0.080 to F3-11 0.100 m/s ★
speed
Group F4: Floor parameters
F4-00 Leveling adjustment 0–60 30 mm ★
- 108 -
Function
Code
F4-01 Current floor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★
High byte of current
F4-02 0–65535 1 Pulses ●
floor position
Low byte of current
F4-03 0–65535 34464 Pulses ●
floor position
Length 1 of leveling
F4-04 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
plate
Length 2 of leveling
F4-05 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
plate
High byte of floor
F4-06 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 1
Low byte of floor height
F4-07 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
1
High byte of floor
F4-08 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 2
F4-09 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
2
High byte of floor
F4-10 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 3
F4-11 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
3
High byte of floor
F4-12 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 4
F4-13 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
4
High byte of floor
F4-14 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 5
F4-15 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
5
High byte of floor
F4-16 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 6
F4-17 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
6
High byte of floor
F4-18 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 7
F4-19 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
7
High byte of floor
F4-20 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 8
F4-21 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
8
- 109 -
Function
Code
High byte of floor
F4-22 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 9
F4-23 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
9
High byte of floor
F4-24 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 10
F4-25 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
10
Floor height 11 to floor height 37
High byte of floor
F4-80 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 38
F4-81 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
38
High byte of floor
F4-82 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 39
F4-83 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
39
Group F5: Terminal function parameters
Attendant/Automatic
F5-00 3–200 3 s ★
switchover time
F5-01 X1 function selection 08/40: Inspection signal 33 - ★

09/41: Inspection up
signal
F5-02 X2 function selection 35 - ★
10/42: Inspection down
signal
F5-03 X3 function selection 11/43: Fire emergency 34 - ★
signal
12/44: Up limit signal
F5-04 X4 function selection 13/45: Down limit signal 4 - ★
14/46: Overload signal
F5-05 X5 function selection 15/47: Full-load signal 5 - ★
16/48: Up slow-down 1
signal
F5-06 X6 function selection 17/49: Down slow-down 38 - ★
1 signal
F5-07 X7 function selection signal 39 - ★
F5-08 X8 function selection (To be continued) 22 - ★
- 110 -
Function
Code
19/51: Down slow-down
F5-09 X9 function selection 2 signal 40 - ★
signal
21/53: Down slow-down
3 signal
F5-11 X11 function selection 22/54: Shorting door 10 - ★
lock circuit contactor
feedback
F5-12 X12 function selection 23/55: Firefighter switch 44 - ★
signal
24/56: Door machine 1
F5-13 X13 function selection light curtain signal 45 - ★
light curtain signal
26/58: Brake contactor
feedback 2 signal
F5-15 X15 function selection 27/59: UPS valid signal 49 - ★
28/60: Elevator lock
signal
F5-16 X16 function selection 29/61: Safety circuit 2 50 - ★
feedback signal
30/62: Shorting PMSM
stator feedback signal
31/63: Door lock circuit 2
F5-18 X18 function selection feedback signal 00 - ★
32/64: Reserved
F5-19 X19 function selection safety edge signal 00 - ★
safety edge signal
67/99: Motor overheat
signal
F5-21 X21 function selection 68/100: Earthquake 00 - ★
signal
69/101: Back door
F5-22 X22 function selection forbidden signal 00 - ★
70/102: Light-load signal
71/103: Half-load signal
72/104: Fire emergency
floor switchover signal
(End)
F5-25 CTB input type 0–511 320 - ★
- 111 -
Function
Code
0: Invalid
1: RUN contactor control
F5-26 Y1 function selection 2: Brake contactor 1 - ★
control
3: Shorting door lock
circuit contactor control
4: Fire emergency floor
arrival signal feedback
F5-27 Y2 function selection 5: Door machine 1 open 2 - ★
6: Door machine 1 close

7: Door machine 2 open
8: Door machine 2 close
9: Brake and RUN
F5-28 Y3 function selection contactors healthy 3 - ★
10: Fault state
11: Running monitor
12: Shorting PMSM
stator contactor
F5-29 Y4 function selection 13: Emergency 4 - ★
evacuation automatic
switchover
14: System healthy
15: Emergency buzzer
control
F5-30 Y5 function selection 16: High-voltage startup 0 - ★
of brake
17: Elevator running in
up direction
18: Lamp/Fan running
19: Medical sterilization
F5-31 Y6 function selection 20: Non-door zone stop 0 - ★
21: Electric lock
22: Non-service state
Monitoring of
Communication state
F5-32 CANbus and Modbus - - ●
display
communication states
- 112 -
Function
Code
Bit3: Elevator fire
emergency requirement
for Hong Kong
Bit4: Arrival gong
disabled at night
Bit6: Door lock
disconnected at
inspection switched over
to normal running
Terminal program
F5-33 Bit7: Fault code not 0 - ★
control
displayed on the keypad
Bit8: Door open
command cancelled
immediately at door
open limit
Bit9: Car stop and zero-
speed torque holding
at abnormal brake
feedback
Monitoring of I/O
F5-34 Terminal state display - - ●
terminals on MCB
Monitoring of I/O
F5-35 Terminal state display terminals on CTB, CCB - - ●
and HOP
0: Invalid
Load cell input 1: CTB digital input
F5-36 1 - ★
selection 2: CTB analog input
3: MCB analog input
F5-37 X25 function selection 0: No function 0 - ★
F5-38 X26 function selection 4: Safety circuit signal 0 - ★
F5-39 X27 function selection 5: Door lock circuit signal 0 - ★
Group F6: Basic elevator parameters
Top floor of the
F6-00 F6-01 to 40 9 - ★
elevator
Bottom floor of the
F6-01 1 to F6-00 1 - ★
elevator
F6-02 Parking floor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★
F6-03 Fire emergency floor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★
F6-04 Elevator lock floor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★
F6-05 Service floors 1 0–65535 65535 - ★
F6-06 Service floors 2 0–65535 65535 - ★
- 113 -
Function
Code
F6-07 1–8 1 - ★
group mode
F6-08 Elevator No. 1–8 1 - ★
Bit0: Dispersed waiting
Bit2: Parallel
implemented at
monitoring port
Bit3: Parallel
implemented at CAN2
Bit4: Parallel control
in compatibility with
NICE3000
Elevator program
F6-09 Bit6: Clear floor number 0 - ★
control
and display direction in
advance
Bit8: Single hall call
button
Bit10: Err30 judgment at
re-leveling cancellation
Bit14: Time interval
detection of safety circuit
2 and door lock circuit 2
Leveling sensor filter
F6-10 10–50 14 ms ★
time
- 114 -
Function
Code
Bit1: Disabling returning
to base floor for
verification
Bit2: Cancelling auto
sequential arrange of
hall call floor addresses
to be displayed
Bit5: Current detection
valid at startup for
synchronous motor
Bit6: Reversing MCB
lamp output
Bit7: Door open valid
at non-door zone in the
Elevator function inspection state
F6-11 8448 - ★
selection Bit8: Door open and
close once after
inspection turned to
normal
Bit10: Buzzer not tweet
upon re-leveling
Bit11: Super short floor
function
Bit13: Err53 fault auto
reset
Bit14: Up slow-down not
reset for super short floor
Bit15: Down slow-down
not reset for super short
floor
F6-12 VIP floor 0 to F6-00 0 - ★
F6-13 VIP floor 0 to F6-00 0 - ★
Start time of down
F6-14 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
collective selective 1
End time of down
F6-15 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
Start time of down
F6-16 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
End time of down
F6-17 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
Start time of time-
F6-18 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
based floor service 1
End time of time-based
F6-19 00.00–23.59 0 HH.MM ☆
floor service 1
- 115 -
Function
Code
Service floor 1 of time-
F6-20 0–65535 65535 - ☆
F6-21 0–65535 65535 - ☆
Start time of time-
F6-22 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
F6-23 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
floor service 2
F6-24 0–65535 65535 - ☆
F6-25 0–65535 65535 - ☆
F6-26 Peak 1 start time 00.00–23.59 0 HH.MM ☆
F6-27 Peak 1 end time 00.00–23.59 0 HH.MM ☆
F6-28 Peak 1 floor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★
F6-29 Peak 2 start time 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
F6-30 Peak 2 end time 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
F6-31 Peak 2 floor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★
F6-35 Service floor 3 0–65535 65535 - ☆
F6-36 0–65535 65535 - ☆
F6-37 0–65535 65535 - ☆
F6-38 Elevator lock start time 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
F6-39 Elevator lock end time 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
- 116 -
Function
Code
Bit0: Disability function
Bit1: Soft limit function
Bit2: JP16 input used as
back door selection
Bit3: JP16 input used
as the back door open
signal
Bit4: Opening only one
door of opposite doors
under manual control
Bit5: Timed elevator lock
Bit6: Manual door
Bit7: Elevator lock/Fire
emergency under hall
call at any floor
Program control Bit9: Disabling reverse
F6-40 floor number clear 0 - ★
selection 1
Bit10: Displaying next
arriving floor number
Bit11: Responding to car
calls first
Bit12: Car call assisted
command in single
door used as disability
function
Bit13: Folding command
used as disability
function and back door
function
Bit14: Car call command
folding
Bit15: JP20 used for
switchover to back door
- 117 -
Function
Code
Bit2: Inspection to stop
due to slow-down 1
Bit4: Buzzer tweet during
door open delay
Bit6: Cancelling door
open delay
Bit8: Elevator lock at
door open
Bit9: Display available at
Program control elevator lock
F6-41 0 - ★
selection 2 Bit10: Elevator lock in
the attendant state
Bit11: Blinking at arrival
(within the time set in
F6-47)
Bit12: Door re-open
during door open delay
Bit13: Door re-open after
car call of the present
floor
Bit1: Cancelling door
open/close command at
delay after door open/
close limit
Program control Bit2: Not judging door
F6-42 0 - ★
selection 3 lock state at door close
output
Bit3: Door close
command output during
running
bit0: Calls cancelled after
entering attendant state
bit1: Not responding to
hall calls
bit2: Attendant/Automatic
state switchover
bit3: Door close at
Attendant function jogging
F6-43 0 - ★
selection bit4: Automatic door
close
bit5: Buzzer tweet at
intervals in attendant
state
bit6: Buzzer tweet at
intervals in attendant
state
- 118 -
Function
Code
Bit3: Arrival gong output
in inspection or fire
emergency state
Bit4: Multiple car
calls registered in fire
emergency state
Bit5: Retentive at power
failure in fire emergency
state
Bit6: Closing door by
holding down the door
close button
Bit7: Door close at low
Fire emergency speed
F6-44 16456 - ★
function selection
Bit8: Door close at car
call registering
Bit9: Displaying hall calls
in fire emergency state
Bit11: Exiting fire
emergency state for
firefighter
Bit14: Opening door by
holding down the door
open button
Bit15: Automatic door
open in fire emergency
floor
- 119 -
Function
Code
Bit0-Bit1: Direction
determine mode
(00: Automatically
calculating direction;
01: Load direction
determining; 10:
Direction of nearest
landing floor)
Bit2: Stopping at
evacuation parking floor
Bit3: Door open at single
leveling signal
Bit4: Compensation at
startup
Emergency evacuation Bit8: Emergency running
F6-45 0 - ★
function selection time protection
Bit10: Emergency buzzer
output
Bit12: Shorting stator
braking mode switched
over to controller drive
Bit13: Mode of shorting
stator braking mode
switched over to
controller drive
Bit14: Emergency
evacuation exit mode
Bit15: Function selection
of shorting stator braking
mode
Bit0: VIP enabled by hall
call (at VIP floor)
Bit1: VIP enabled by
F6-46 VIP function selection 0 s ★
terminal
Bit8: Number of VIP car
calls limited
F6-47 Blinking advance time 0.0–15.0 0 s ☆
Emergency evacuation
F6-48 0.010–0.630 0.010 m/s ★
switching speed
Evacuation parking
F6-49 0 to F6-01 0 - ★
floor
Group F7: Test function parameters
F7-00 Car call floor registered 0 to F6-00 0 - ☆
F7-01 Up call floor registered 0 to F6-00 0 - ☆
- 120 -
Function
Code
Down call floor
F7-02 0 to F6-00 0 - ☆
registered
F7-03 Random running times 0–60000 0 - ☆
0: Yes
F7-04 Hall call enabled 0 - ☆
1: No
0: Yes
F7-05 Door open enabled 0 - ☆
1: No
0: Disabled
F7-06 Overload function 0 - ☆
1: Enabled
0: Enabled
F7-07 Limit switch 0 - ☆
1: Disabled
Time interval of
F7-08 0–1000 0 s ☆
random running
Group F8: Enhanced function parameters
Load for load cell auto-
F8-00 0–100 0 % ★
tuning
1: Load cell pre-torque
F8-01 Pre-torque selection compensation 0 - ★
2: Automatic pre-torque
compensation
F8-02 Pre-torque offset 0.0–100.0 50.0 % ★
F8-03 Drive gain 0.00–2.00 0.60 - ★
F8-04 Brake gain 0.00–2.00 0.60 - ★
F8-05 Current car load 0–1023 0 - ●

F8-06 Car no-load load 0–1023 0 - ★
F8-07 Car full-load load 0–1023 100 - ★
0: Anti-nuisance function
disabled
1: Nuisance judged by
load cell
F8-08 Anti-nuisance function 0 - ☆
light curtain
light-load signal
F8-09 operation speed at 0.000–0.100 0.050 m/s ★
power failure
- 121 -
Function
Code
0: Motor not running
1: UPS
F8-10 operation mode at 0 - ★
power failure 2: 48 V battery power
supply
F8-11 Brake apply delay 0.000–1.000 0.600 s ☆
F8-12 Fire emergency floor 2 Fire emergency floor 2 0 - ☆
HCB communication Bit4: Energy saving of
F8-14 0 - ☆
setting HCB communication
Start address of hall
F8-16 0–40 0 - ☆
call auxiliary command
F8-17 Hall call address check 0–1 0 - ☆
Group F9: Time parameters
Idle time before
F9-00 0–240 10 min ☆
returning to base floor
Time for fan and lamp
F9-01 0–240 2 min ☆
to be turned off
Motor running time
F9-02 0–45 45 s ★
limit
Current
F9-03 Clock: year 2000–2100 YYYY ☆
year
Current
F9-04 Clock: month 1–12 MM ☆
month
Current
F9-05 Clock: day 1–31 DD ☆
day
Current
F9-06 Clock: hour 0–23 HH ☆
hour
Current
F9-07 Clock: minute 0–59 MM ☆
minute
Accumulative running
F9-09 0–65535 0 h ●
time
High byte of running
F9-11 0–9999 0 - ●
times
Low byte or running
F9-12 0–9999 0 - ●
times
- 122 -
Function
Code
Group FA: Keypad setting parameters
0: Reversed display of
physical floor
1: Positive display of
Keypad display physical floor
FA-00 3 - ☆
selection 2: Reversed display of
hall call floor
3: Positive display of hall
call floor
Display in running
FA-01 1–65535 65535 - ☆
state
FA-02 Display in stop state 1–65535 65535 - ☆
Degree
FA-03 Current encoder angle 0.0–359.9 0.0 ●
(°)
Control board software
FA-05 0–65535 0 - ●
(ZK)
Drive board software
FA-06 0–65535 0 - ●
(DSP)
FA-07 Heatsink temperature 0–100 0 °C ●
FA-11 Pre-torque current 0.0–200.0 0 % ●
FA-12 Pre-torque current 0.0–200.0 0 - ●
FA-13 Curve information 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-14 Set speed 0.000–4.000 0 m/s ●
FA-15 Feedback speed 0.000–4.000 0 m/s ●
FA-16 Bus voltage 0–999.9 0 V ●
FA-17 Present position 0.00–300.0 0 m ●
FA-18 Output current 0.0–999.9 0 A ●
FA-19 Output frequency 0.00–99.99 0 Hz ●
FA-20 Torque current 0.0–999.9 0 A ●
FA-21 Output voltage 0–999.9 0 V ●
FA-22 Output torque 0–100 0 % ●
FA-23 Output power 0.00–99.99 0 kW ●
- 123 -
Function
Code
Communication
FA-24 0–65535 0 - ●
interference
FA-26 Input state 1 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-27 Input state 2 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-28 Input state 3 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-30 Input state 5 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-31 Output state 1 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-32 Output state 2 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-33 Car input state 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-34 Car output state 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-35 Hall sate 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-36 System state 1 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-37 System state 2 0–65535 0 - ●
Hall call
FA-46 0–65535 (floors 1–16) 0 - ●
communication state 1
Hall call
FA-47 0–65535 (floors 17–32) 0 - ●
Hall call
FA-48 0–65535 (floors 33–40) 0 - ●
Group FB: Door function parameters
Number of door
Fb-00 1–2 1 - ☆
machine(s)
Fb-01 CTB software 00–999 0 - ●
Service floors 1 of door
Fb-02 0–65535 65535 - ☆
machine 1
Fb-03 0–65535 65535 - ☆
machine 1
Fb-04 0–65535 65535 - ☆
machine 2
Fb-05 0–65535 65535 - ☆
machine 2
Door open protection
Fb-06 5–99 10 s ☆
time
Arrival gong output
Fb-07 0–1000 0 ms ☆
delay
Door close protection
Fb-08 5–99 15 s ☆
time
Fb-09 Door re-open times 0–20 0 - ☆
- 124 -
Function
Code
0: Closing the door as
normal at base floor
Door state of standby 1: Waiting with door
Fb-10 0 - ☆
elevator open at base floor
2: Waiting with door
open at each floor
Door open holding
Fb-11 1–1000 5 s ☆
time for hall call
Door open holding
Fb-12 1–1000 3 s ☆
time for car call
Door open holding
Fb-13 1–1000 10 s ☆
time at base floor
Fb-14 Door open delay 10–1000 30 s ☆
Special door open
Fb-15 10–1000 30 s ☆
holding time
Manual door open
Fb-16 1–60 5 s ☆
holding time
Holding time for forced
Fb-17 5–180 120 s ☆
door close
Fb-18 0–65535 65535 - ☆
machine 1
Fb-19 0–65535 65535 - ☆
machine 2
Group FC: Protection function parameters
Bit0: Short-circuit to
ground detection at
power-on
Program control for
FC-00 Bit2: Decelerating to stop 0 - ★
protection function
at valid light curtain
Bit9: Mode without door
open/close limit
- 125 -
Function
Code
Bit0: Overload protection
Bit1: Canceling
protection at output
phase loss
Bit2: Canceling over-
modulation function
Program control 2 for Bit4: Light curtain
FC-01 65 - ★
protection function judgment at door close
limit
Bit5: Canceling SPI
communication judgment
Bit14: Canceling
protection at input phase
loss
Overload protection
FC-02 0.50–10.00 1.00 - ★
coefficient
Overload pre-warning
FC-03 50–100 80 % ★
coefficient
Opposite door
FC-04 0–3 0 - ★
selection
FC-06 Designated fault 0–99 0 - ☆
FC-07 Designated fault code 0–9999 0 - ●
Designated fault
FC-08 0–65535 0 - ●
subcode
Designated fault month
FC-09 0–1231 0 MM.DD ●
and day
Designated fault hour
FC-10 0–23.59 0 HH.MM ●
and minute
Logic information of
FC-11 0–65535 0 - ●
designated fault
Curve information of
FC-12 0–65535 0 - ●
designated fault
Set speed upon
FC-13 0.000–4.000 0 m/s ●
designated fault
Feedback speed upon
FC-14 0.000–4.000 0 m/s ●
designated fault
Bus voltage upon
FC-15 0.0–999.9 0 v ●
designated fault
Current position upon
FC-16 0.0–300.0 0 m ●
designated fault
Output current upon
FC-17 0.0–999.9 0 A ●
designated fault
- 126 -
Function
Code
Output frequency upon
FC-18 0.00–99.99 0 Hz ●
designated fault
Torque current upon
FC-19 0.0–999.9 0 A ●
designated fault
FC-20 1st fault code 0–9999 0 - ●
FC-21 1st fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
1st fault month and
FC-22 0–1231 0 MM.DD ●
day
1st fault hour and
FC-23 0–23.59 0 HH.MM ●
minute
FC-24 2nd fault code 0–9999 0 - ●
FC-25 2nd fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
2nd fault month and
FC-26 0–1231 0 MM.DD ●
day
2nd fault hour and
FC-27 0–23.59 0 HH.MM ●
minute
FC-28 3rd fault code 0–9999 0 - ●
FC-29 3rd fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
3rd fault month and
FC-30 0–1231 0 MM.DD ●
day
3rd fault hour and
FC-31 0–23.59 0 HH.MM ●
minute
FC-32 4th fault code 0–9999 0 - ●
FC-33 4th fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
4th fault month and
FC-34 0–1231 0 MM.DD ●
day
4th fault hour and
FC-35 0–23.59 0 HH.MM ●
minute
··· ●
FC-56 10th fault code 0–9999 0 - ●
10th fault month and
FC-58 0–1231 0 MM.DD ●
day
10th fault hour and
FC-59 0–23.59 0 HH.MM ●
minute
FC-60 Latest fault code 0–9999 0 - ●
FC-61 Latest fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
- 127 -
Function
Code
Latest fault month and
FC-62 0–1231 0 MM.DD ●
day
Latest fault hour and
FC-63 0–23.59 0 HH.MM ●
minute
FC-64 0–65535 0 - ●
latest fault
FC-65 0–65535 0 - ●
latest fault
Set speed upon latest
FC-66 0.000–4.000 0 m/s ●
fault
Feedback speed upon
FC-67 0.000–4.000 0 m/s ●
latest fault
Bus voltage upon
FC-68 0.0–999.9 0 v ●
latest fault
FC-69 0.0–300.0 0 m ●
latest fault
Output current upon
FC-70 0–999.9 0 A ●
latest fault
FC-71 0.00–99.99 0 Hz ●
latest fault
Torque current upon
FC-72 0.0–999.9 0 A ●
latest fault
Group Fd: Communication parameters
0: 9600
FD-00 Baud rate 0 bit/s ★
1: 38400
0–127
FD-02 Local address 1 - ★
0: Broadcast address
Communication
FD-03 0–20 10 ms ★
response delay
Communication
FD-04 0.0–60.0 0.0 s ★
timeout
FD-05 Re-leveling stop delay 0.00–2.00 0.00 s ★
- 128 -
Function
Code
0: Reserved
NO/NC input:
FD-07 HCB:JP1 input 1/33: Elevator lock signal 1 - ★
2/34: Fire emergency
signal
3/35: Current floor
forbidden
4/36: VIP floor signal
FD-08 HCB:JP2 input 5/37: Security floor 2 - ★
signal
6/38: Door close button
input
0: Invalid
FD-09 HCB:JP1 output 1: Up arrival indicator 1 - ★
2: Down arrival indicator
3: Fault output
4: Non-door zone stop
output
FD-10 HCB:JP2 output 5: Non-service state 2 - ★
output
6: Door close button
indicator output
FD-11 HCB-B:JP1 input 0 - ★

0: Reserved
NO/NC input:
3/35: Door 2 selection
4/36: Door 2 restricted
FD-14 HCB-B:JP4 input (back door forbidden) 0 - ★
5/37: Door 1 safety edge
FD-15 HCB-B:JP5 input 6/38: Door 2 safety edge 0 - ★
7/39: Single/double door
selection
- 129 -
Function
Code
FD-17 HCB-B:A1 output 0 - ★
0: Reserved
FD-18 HCB-B:A2 output 1: Fault output 0 - ★
FD-19 HCB-B:B1 output 2: Non-door zone stop 0 - ★
FD-20 HCB-B:B2 output output 0 - ★
FD-21 HCB-B:C1 output 0 - ★
output
4: Fire emergency output
FD-23 HCB-B:C3 output 5: Power failure 0 - ★
FD-24 HCB-B:C4 output emergency output 0 - ★
FD-25 HCB-B:C5 output 6: Door lock valid 0 - ★
7: Night output signal
Group FE: Elevator function parameters
0: Full collective
selective
Collective selective
FE-00 1: Down collective 0 - ★
mode
selective
2: Up collective selective
The two high digits
indicate the display code
FE-01 Floor 1 display of the ten's digit, and the 1901 - ☆
two low digits indicate
the display code of the
unit's digit.
00: Display "0"
FE-02 Floor 2 display 1902 - ☆
01: Display "1"
02: Display "2"
03: Display "3"
FE-03 Floor 3 display 04: Display "4" 1903 - ☆
05: Display "5"
06: Display "6"
07: Display "7"
FE-04 Floor 4 display 08: Display "8" 1904 - ☆
09: Display "9"
10: Display "A"
11: Display "B"
FE-05 Floor 5 display 12: Display "G" 1905 - ☆
13: Display "H"
14: Display "L"
15: Display "M"
16: Display "P"
(To be continued)
- 130 -
Function
Code
FE-07 Floor 7 display 17: Display "R" 1907 - ☆
FE-08 Floor 8 display 18: Display "-" 1908 - ☆
19: No display
20: Display "12"
21: Display "13"
22: Display "23"
FE-12 Floor 12 display 23: Display "C" 0102 - ☆
FE-13 Floor 13 display 24: Display "D" 0103 - ☆
FE-14 Floor 14 display 25: Display "E" 0104 - ☆
FE-15 Floor 15 display 26: Display "F" 0105 - ☆
27: Display "I"
Floor 16 to floor 30 display
28: Display "J"
29: Display "K"
30: Display "N"
FE-36 Floor 33 display 31: Display "O" 0 - ☆
FE-37 Floor 34 display 32: Display "Q" 0 - ☆
FE-38 Floor 35 display 33: Display "S" 0 - ☆
FE-39 Floor 36 display 34: Display "T" 0 - ☆
35: Display "U"
36: Display "V"
37: Display "W"
FE-42 Floor 39 display 38: Display "X" 0 - ☆
FE-43 Floor 40 display 39: Display "Y" 0 - ☆
FE-52 Highest digit selection 1 40: Display "Z" 0 - ☆
FE-53 Highest digit selection 2 41: Display "15" 0 - ☆
FE-54 Highest digit selection 3 42: Display "17" 0 - ☆
43: Display "19"
FE-55 Highest digit selection 4 0 - ☆
FE-56 Highest digit selection 5 (End) 0 - ☆
- 131 -
Function
Code
Bit2: Re-leveling function
Bit3: Door pre-open
function
Bit4: Stuck hall call
cancellation
Bit5: Night security floor
function
Bit6: Down collective
Elevator function selective peak service
FE-32 34816 - ☆
selection 1 Bit7: Parallel peak
service
Bit8: Time-based service
floor function
Bit9: VIP function
Bit11: Car call deletion
Bit12: Hall call deletion
Bit15: Door lock short-
circuit detection
Bit1: Door open holding
at open limit
Bit2: Door close
command not output
upon door close limit
Bit4: Auto reset for RUN
and brake contactor
stuck
Bit5: Slow-down switch
Elevator function stuck detection
FE-33 36 - ☆
selection 2 Bit7: Forced door close
Bit8: NO shorting motor
stator contactor
Bit9: Immediate stop
upon re-leveling
Bit13: High-speed
elevator protection
function
Bit15: Opposite door
independent control
Group Fr: Leveling adjustment parameters
Leveling adjustment 0: Disabled

Fr-00 0 - ★
function 1: Enabled
- 132 -
Function
Code
Leveling adjustment
Fr-01 30030 mm ★
record 1
Leveling adjustment
Fr-02 30030 mm ★
record 2 00000–60060
… …
Leveling adjustment
Fr-20 30030 mm ★
record 20
Group FF: Factory parameters
Group FP: User parameters
FP-00 User password 0–65535 0 - ☆
0: No operation
1: Restore default
FP-01 Parameter update 0 - ★
settings
2: Clear fault records
User-defined 0: Invalid
FP-02 0 - ★
parameter display 1: Valid
- 133 -
- 134 -
7
Description of Function Codes
Description of Function Codes NICE3000new User Manual
Chapter 7 Description of Function Codes
Group F0: Basic Parameters

Function Parameter
Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code Name
•• 0: Sensorless flux vector
control (SFVC)
Control •• 1: Closed-loop vector control
F0-00 1 - ★
mode (CLVC)
•• 2: Voltage/Frequency (V/F)
control
It is used to set the control mode of the system.

•• 0: Sensorless flux vector control (SFVC)
It is applicable to low-speed running during no-load commissioning of the asynchronous
motor, fault judgment at inspection, and synchronous motor running on special
conditions.
•• 1: Closed-loop vector control (CLVC)
It is applicable to normal running in distance control.
•• 2: Voltage/Frequency (V/F) control
It is applicable to equipment detection where the ratio between the voltage and the
frequency is fixed, control is simple, and the low-frequency output torque feature is poor.
Function
Code
Command source 0: Operation panel control

F0-01 1 - ★
selection 1: Distance control
It is used to set the source of running commands and running speed references.
•• 0: Operation panel control
STOP
The controller is operated by pressing RUN and RES
on the operation panel, and
the running speed is set by F0-02 (Running speed under operation panel control). This
method is applicable only to the test or motor no-load auto-tuning.
•• 1: Distance control
This method is used in the NICE series integrated elevator controller. During inspection,
the elevator runs at the speed set in F3-11. During normal running, the controller
automatically calculates the speed and running curve for the elevator based on the
distance between the current floor and the target floor within the rated elevator speed,
implementing direct stop.
- 136 -
NICE3000new User Manual Description of Function Codes
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property

Running speed under
F0-02 0.050 to F0-04 0.050 m/s ☆
operation panel control
It is used to set the running speed in the operation panel control mode.
Note that this function is enabled only when F0-01 is set to 0 (Operation panel control). You
can change the running speed of the elevator by modifying this parameter during running

F0-03 Maximum running speed 0.250 to F0-04 1.600 m/s ★
It is used to set the actual maximum running speed of the elevator. The value must be
smaller than the rated elevator speed.

F0-04 Rated elevator speed 0.250–4.000 1.600 m/s ★
It is used to set the norminal rated speed of the elevator. The value of this parameter is
dependent on the elevator mechanism and traction motor.
Note
F0-03 is the actual running speed within the elevator speed range set in F0-04. For example, for a
certain elevator, if F0-04 is 1.750 m/s and the actually required maximum running speed is 1.600
m/s, set F0-03 to 1.600 m/s.

F0-05 Rated elevator load 300–9999 1000 kg ★
It is used to set the rated elevator load. This parameter is used for the anti-nuisance
function.

F0-06 Maximum frequency 20.00–99.00 50.00 Hz ★
It is used to set the maximum output frequency of the system. This value must be larger
than the rated motor frequency.

F0-07 Carrier frequency 0.5–16.0 6.0 kHz ★
It is used to set the carrier frequency of the controller.

The carrier frequency is closely related to the motor noise during running. When it is
generally set above 6 kHz, mute running is achieved. It is recommended to set the carrier
frequency to the lowest within the allowable noise, which reduces the controller loss and
radio frequency interference.
•• If the carrier frequency is low, output current has high harmonics, and the power loss
and temperature rise of the motor increase.
- 137 -
•• If the carrier frequency is high, power loss and temperature rise of the motor declines.
However, the system has an increase in power loss, temperature rise and interference.
Adjusting the carrier frequency will exert influences on the aspects listed in the following
table.
Table 7-1 Influences of carrier frequency adjustment
Carrier frequency Low High

Motor noise Large Small
Output current waveform Bad Good
Motor temperature rise High Low
Controller temperature rise Low High
Leakage current Small Large
External radiation interference Small Large
Note
On certain environment conditions (the heatsink temperature is too high), the system will reduce
the carrier frequency to provide overheat protection for the controller, preventing the controller
from being damaged due to overheat. If the temperature cannot reduce in this case, the controller
reports the overheat fault.
Group F1: Motor Parameter

0: SIN/COS encoder
F1-00 Encoder type 1: UVW encoder 0 - ★
2: ABZ incremental encoder
It is used to set the encoder type matching the motor.

When F1-25 is set to 1 (Synchronous motor), set this parameter correctly before auto-
tuning; otherwise, the motor cannot run properly.
When F1-25 is set to 0 (Asynchronous motor), this parameter is automatically changed to 2.
You need not modify it manually.
Function
Code
Model
F1-01 Rated motor power 0.7–75.0 kW ★
dependent
Model
F1-02 Rated motor voltage 0–600 V ★
dependent
Model
F1-03 Rated motor current 0.00–655.00 A ★
dependent
Rated motor Model
F1-04 0.00–99.00 Hz ★
frequency dependent
- 138 -
Function
Code
Rated motor rotational Model
F1-05 0–3000 RPM ★
speed dependent
Set these parameters according to the motor nameplate.

Ensure that these motor parameters are set correctly. Incorrect setting affects the motor
auto-tuning and the vector control effect.

Encoder initial angle Degree
F1-06 0.0–359.9 0 ★
(synchronous motor) (°)
Encoder angle at power- Degree
F1-07 0.0–359.9 0 ★
off (synchronous motor) (°)
Synchronous motor
F1-08 0–15 0 - ★
wiring mode
These parameters are obtained by means of motor auto-tuning.

F1-06 specifies the encoder angle at zero point. After multiple times of auto-tuning, compare
the obtained values, and the value deviation of F1-06 shall be within ±5°.
F1-07 specifies the angle of the magnetic pole when the motor is powered off. The value is
recorded at power-off and is used for comparison at next power-on.
F1-08 specifies the motor wiring mode, that is, whether the output phase sequence of the
drive board is consistent with the UVW phase sequence of the motor. If the value obtained
by means of no-load auto-tuning is an even number, the phase sequence is correct. If the
value is an odd number, the sequence is incorrect; in this case, exchange any two of UWW
phases of the motor.
Note
With-load auto-tuning of the synchronous motor can be performed only when the UVW phase
sequence of the motor is consistent with the output phase sequence of the controller.

Current filter time
F1-09 0–40 0 - ★
(synchronous motor)
It is used to set the current filter time, which suppress the periodic vertical jitter. Increase the
value in ascending order of 3 to achieve the optimum effect.

F1-10 Encoder verification selection 0–65535 0 - ★
It is used to set encoder signal verification. This parameter is set by the manufacturer, and
you need not modify it generally.
- 139 -

0: No operation
F1-11 Auto-tuning mode 0 - ★
It is used to select the auto-tuning mode.

"With-load auto-tuning" is static auto-tuning for the asynchronous motor and rotary auto-
tuning for the synchronous motor. "No-load auto-tuning" is complete auto-tuning, by which
all motor parameters can be obtained.
When F1-11 is set to 2 (No-load auto-tuning), the motor must be completely disconnected
from the load; otherwise, the auto-tuning effect will be affected. When TUNE is displayed on
the operation panel, you need to manually release the brake before starting auto-tuning. For
details on the auto-tuning process, see the description in section 5.1.3.

F1-12 Encoder pulses per revolution 0–10000 2048 PPR ★
It is used to set the pulses per revolution of the encoder (according to the encoder
nameplate).
This parameter is critical to CLVC. Set the encoder nominal value in this parameter.
Otherwise, the elevator may not run properly. When the feedback pulses received by the
system is data after frequency division by other equipment, set the frequency-division value
rather than the encoder nominal value in this parameter. For example, if the pulses per
revolution of the encoder is 8192 and is sent to the system after 1/4 frequency division, set
this parameter to 2048 (8192/4 = 2048).
Note
F0-04 (Rated elevator speed), F1-05 (Rated motor rotational speed), and F1-12 (Encoder pulses
per revolution) determine whether the elevator can run properly. If any of these parameters is
changed, shaft auto-tuning must be performed again.

Encoder wire-breaking
F1-13 0–10.0 1.0 s ★
detection time
This parameter is used to set the time that a wire-break fault lasts before being detected.
After the elevator starts running at non-zero speed, if there is no encoder signal input within
the time set in this parameter, the system prompts the encoder fault and stops running.
When the value is smaller than 0.5s, this function is disabled.

Stator resistance Model
F1-14 0.000–30.000 Ω ★
- 140 -

Rotor resistance Model
F1-15 0.000–30.000 Ω ★
Leakage inductance Model
F1-16 0.00–300.00 mH ★
Mutual inductance Model
F1-17 0.1–3000.0 mH ★
Magnetizing current Model
F1-18 0.01–300.00 A ★
These parameters are obtained by means of motor auto-tuning. After the motor auto-tuning
is completed successfully, the values of these parameters are updated automatically.
If motor auto-tuning cannot be performed onsite, manually enter the values by referring to
data of the motor with the same nameplate parameters.
Each time F1-01 (Rated motor power) of the asynchronous motor is modified, these
parameters automatically resume to the default values for the standard motor.

F1-19 Shaft Q inductance (torque) 0.00–650.00 3.00 mH ★
F1-20 Shaft D inductance (excitation) 0.00–650.00 3.00 mH ★
F1-21 Back EMF 0–65535 0 - ★
These parameters are obtained by means of motor auto-tuning.

F1-25 Motor type 1 - ★
It is used to set the motor type. This parameter must be set correctly before motor auto-
tuning; otherwise, the motor auto-tuning cannot be performed.
Group F2: Vector Control Parameters

F2-00 Speed loop proportional gain KP1 0–100 40 - ★
F2-01 Speed loop integral time TI1 0.01–10.00 0.60 s ★
F2-02 Switchover frequency 1 0.00 to F2-05 2.00 Hz ★
F2-00 and F2-01 are PI regulation parameters when the running frequency is smaller than
the value of F2-02 (Switchover frequency 1).

F2-03 Speed loop proportional gain KP2 0–100 35 - ★
F2-04 Speed loop integral time TI2 0.01–10.00 0.80 s ★
F2-05 Switchover frequency 2 F2-02 to F0-06 5.00 Hz ★
- 141 -
F2-03 and F2-04 are PI regulation parameters when the running frequency is larger than the
value of F2-05 (Switchover frequency 2).
If the running frequency is between F2-02 and F2-05, the speed loop PI parameters are
obtained from the weighted average value of the two groups of PI parameters (F2-00, F2-01
and F2-03, F2-04), as shown in Figure 7-1.
Figure 7-1 Relationship between running frequencies and PI parameters
PI
parameters
F2-00
F2-01
F2-03
F2-04
F2-02 (Switchover F2-05 (Switchover Frequency

frequency 1) frequency 2) reference
The speed dynamic response characteristics in vector control can be adjusted by setting the
proportional gain and integral time of the speed regulator.
To achieve a faster system response, increase the proportional gain and reduce the integral
time. Be aware that this may lead to system oscillation.
The recommended adjustment method is as follows:
If the default setting cannot meet the requirements, make proper adjustment. Increase the
proportional gain first to ensure that the system does not oscillate, and then reduce the
integral time to ensure that the system has quick response and small overshoot.
If both F2-02 (Switchover frequency 1) and F2-05 (Switchover frequency 2) are 0, only F2-
03 and F2-04 are valid.

F2-06 Current loop KP1 (torque) 10–500 60 - ★
F2-07 Current loop KI1 (torque) 10–500 30 - ★
These two parameters are regulation parameters for the torque axis current loop.
These parameters are used as the torque axis current regulator in vector control. The best
values of the parameters matching the motor characteristics are obtained by means of
motor auto-tuning. You need not modify them generally.

F2-08 Torque upper limit 0.0–200.0 150.0 % ★
It is used to set the torque upper limit of the motor. The value 100% corresponds to the rated
output torque of the adaptable motor.

F2-10 Elevator running direction 0–3 0 - ★
- 142 -
It is used to set the elevator running direction.

The values are as follows:
•• 0: Running direction and position pulse direction unchanged
•• 1: Running direction reversed, position pulse direction reversed
•• 2: Running direction unchanged, position pulse direction reversed
•• 3: Running direction reversed, position pulse direction unchanged
You can modify this parameter to reverse the running direction (without changing the wiring
of the motor) and position pulse direction (pulse direction for determining the elevator
position in F4-03).
For example, if inspection on the up direction needs to be performed after the elevator is
installed, but the elevator is in down direction, you need to reverse the running direction; if
the pulses indicated by F4-03 decrease (that is, down direction) during inspection up, you
need to reverse the position pulse direction.
The correct directions are as follows:
During inspection up, the car moves upward, and the pulses indicated by F4-03 increase;
during inspection down, the car moves downward, and the pulses indicated by F4-03
decrease.
Pay attention to the setting of this parameter when restoring the default setting.

F2-11 Zero servo current coefficient 0.20–50.0 15 % ★
F2-12 Zero servo speed loop KP 0.00–2.00 0.5 - ★
F2-13 Zero servo speed loop KI 0.00–2.00 0.6 - ★
These parameters are used to adjust automatic pre-torque compensation in the case of no-
load-cell. The no-load-cell startup function is enabled when F8-01 is set to 2.
Decrease the values of these parameters in the case of car lurch at startup, and increase
the values in the case of rollback at startup. For details, see the description of section 5.1.5.

F2-16 Torque acceleration time 1–500 1 ms ★
F2-17 Torque deceleration time 1–500 350 ms ★
These two parameters are used to set the acceleration time and deceleration time of the
torque current.
Due to different characteristics, the motor may have an abnormal sound when the current
is withdrawn at stop. In this case, you can increase the torque deceleration time properly to
eliminate the abnormal sound.

F2-18 Startup acceleration time 0.000–1.500 0.000 s ★
It is used to set the acceleration time of the startup speed. It is used with F3-00. For details,
see Figure 7-2.
- 143 -
Group F3: Running Control Parameters

F3-00 Startup speed 0.000–0.030 0.000 m/s ★
F3-01 Startup holding time 0.000–0.500 0.000 s ★
These two parameters are used to set the startup speed and startup speed holding time.
For details, see Figure 7-2.
The parameters may reduce the terrace feeling at startup due to static friction between the
guide rail and the guide shoes.

2
F3-02 Acceleration rate 0.200–2.000 0.600 m/s ★
F3-03 Acceleration start jerk time 0.300–4.000 2.500 s ★
F3-04 Acceleration end jerk time 0.300–4.000 2.500 s ★
These parameters are used to set the running curve during acceleration of the elevator.

F3-05 Deceleration rate 0.200–2.000 0.600 m/s2 ★
F3-06 Deceleration end jerk time 0.300–4.000 2.500 s ★
F3-07 Deceleration start jerk time 0.300–4.000 2.500 s ★
These parameters are used to set the running curve during deceleration of the elevator.
•• F3-02 (F3-05) is the acceleration rate (deceleration rate) in the straight-line acceleration
process (deceleration process) of the S curve.
•• F3-03 (F3-07) is the time for the rate to increase from 0 to the value set in F3-02 (F3-05)
in the end jerk segment of the S curve. The larger the value is, the smoother the jerk is.
•• F3-04 (F3-06) is the time for the rate to decrease from the value set in F3-02 (F3-05) to 0
in the start jerk segment of the S curve. The larger the value is, the smoother the jerk is.
Figure 7-2 Setting the running curve
V (speed)
F3-09
F3-04
F3-07
F3-02 F3-05
F3-06
F3-03
F3-01
F3-00
F2-18 t (time)
- 144 -

F3-08 Special deceleration rate 0.500–2.000 0.900 m/s2 ★
It is used to set the deceleration rate in elevator slow-down, inspection, and shaft auto-tuning.
This parameter is not used during normal running. It is used only when the elevator position
is abnormal or the slow-down signal is abnormal, preventing over travel top terminal or over
travel bottom terminal.

F3-09 Pre-deceleration distance 0–90.0 0.0 mm ★
It is used to set the pre-deceleration distance of the elevator in distance control, as shown
in Figure 7-2. This function is to eliminate the effect of encoder signal loss or leveling signal
delay.

F3-10 Re-leveling speed 0.000–0.080 0.040 m/s ★
is used to set the elevator speed during re-leveling.

This parameter is valid only when the pre-open module (MCTC-SCB-A) is added to
implement the re-leveling function (set in FE-32).

F3-11 Inspection speed 0.100–0.630 0.250 m/s ★
It is used to set the elevator speed during inspection and shaft auto-tuning.

F3-12 Position of up slow-down 1 0.000–300.00 0.00 m ★
F3-13 Position of down slow-down 1 0.000–300.00 0.00 m ★
These parameters specify the positions of all slow-down switches relative to the bottom
leveling position, and the positions are automatically recorded during shaft auto-tuning. For
the installation positions of the slow-down switches, see the description of section 3.8.2.
The NICE3000new integrated elevator controller supports a maximum of three pairs of slow-
down switches. From two sides of the shaft to the middle, slow-down 1, slow-down 2, and
slow-down 3 are installed in order; that is, slow-down 1 is installed near the terminal floor.
There may be only one pair of slow-sown switches for the low-speed elevator, and two or
three pairs of slow-down switches for the high-speed elevator.
The system automatically detects the speed when the elevator reaches a slow-down switch.
If the detected speed or position is abnormal, the system enables the elevator to slow down
at the special deceleration rate set in F3-08, preventing over travel top terminal or over
travel bottom terminal.
- 145 -

F3-18 Zero-speed control time at startup 0.000–1.000 0.200 s ★
F3-19 Brake release delay 0.000–1.000 0.600 s ★
F3-20 Zero-speed control time at end 0.200–1.500 0.200 s ★
These parameters are used to set the time related to the zero-speed holding current output
and braking action delay.
•• F3-18 (Zero-speed control time at startup) specifies the time from output of the RUN
contactor to output of the brake contactor, during which the controller performs excitation
on the motor and outputs zero-speed current with large startup torque.
•• F3-19 (Brake release delay) specifies the time from the moment when the system sends
the brake release command to the moment when the brake is completely released,
during which the system retains the zero-speed torque current output.
•• F3-20 (Zero-speed control time at end) specifies the zero-speed output time when the
running curve ends.
•• F8-11 (Brake apply delay) specifies the time from the moment when the system sends
the brake apply command to the moment when the brake is completely applied, during
which the system retains the zero-speed torque current output.
Figure 7-3 Running time sequence
F3-20
V (speed) F3-19 F8-11
F3-18 300 ms
RUN contactor t (time)

Brake contactor
Shorting door lock
circuit contactor
Shorting motor
stator contactor
Internal running
status
Leveling signal
RUN contactor feedback

Brake contactor
feedback
contactor feedback
Shorting motor stator
contactor

F3-21 Low-speed re-leveling speed 0.080 to F3-11 0.100 m/s ★
It is used to set the elevator speed of returning to the leveling position at normal non-leveling
stop.
- 146 -
Group F4: Floor Parameters

F4-00 Leveling adjustment 0–60 30 mm ★
It is used to adjust the leveling accuracy at elevator stop. If over-leveling occurs in elevator
stop at all floors, decrease the value of this parameter properly. If under-leveling occurs in
elevator stop at all floors, increase the value of this parameter properly.
This parameter takes effect to leveling of all floors. Therefore, if leveling at a single floor is
inaccurate, adjust the position of the leveling plate.
The NICE3000new has the advanced distance control algorithm and adopts many methods to
ensure reliability of direct stop. Generally you need not modify this parameter.

F4-01 Current floor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★
This parameter indicates the current floor of the elevator car.

The system automatically changes the value of this parameter during running, and corrects
it at leveling position (door open limit) after the up slow-down and down slow-down switches
act. At non-bottom floor and top-floor leveling, you can also manually modify this parameter,
but the value must be consistent with the actual current floor.

F4-02 High byte of current floor position 0–65535 1 Pulses ●
F4-03 Low byte of current floor position 0–65535 34464 Pulses ●
These two parameters indicate the absolute pulses of the current position of the elevator car
relative to the bottom leveling position.
The position data of the NICE3000new in the shaft is recorded in pulses. Each position is
expressed by a 32-bit binary number, where the high 16 bits indicate the high byte of the
floor position, and the low 16 bits indicate the low byte of the floor position.

F4-04 Length 1 of leveling plate 0–65535 0 mm ★
F4-05 Length 2 of leveling plate 0–65535 0 mm ★
These two parameters respectively indicate the pulses corresponding to the length of
the magnetic value and the length between two leveling sensors. They are automatically
recorded during shaft auto-tuning.

F4-06 High byte of floor height 1 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
F4-07 Low byte of floor height 1 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
…(Floor height 2 to floor height 38)
F4-82 High byte of floor height 39 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
F4-83 Low byte of floor height 39 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
- 147 -
These parameters indicate the pulses corresponding to the floor height i (between the
leveling plates of floor n and floor i+1). Each floor height is expressed by a 32-bit binary
number, where the high 16 bits indicate the high byte of the floor height, and the low 16 bits
indicate the low byte of the floor height. On normal conditions, the floor height i of each floor
is almost the same.
Group F5: Terminal Function Parameters

Attendant/Automatic
F5-00 3–200 3 s ★
switchover time
If there is a hall call at current floor in attendant state, the system automatically switches
over to the automatic (normal) state after the time set in this parameter. After this running is
completed, the system automatically restores to the attendant state (BIT2 of F6-43 must be
set to 1). When the value of this parameter is smaller than 5, this function is disabled, and
the system is in the normal attendant state.

0–127
… ···
These parameters are used to set the functions of input terminals X1 to X24.
Note
Functions 04/36 (Safety circuit feedback NO/NC input), 05/37 (Door lock circuit feedback NO/NC
input), 06/38 (Main contactor feedback NO/NC input), 07/39 (Brake feedback contactor NO/NC
input), 26/58 (Brake contactor feedback 2 NO/NC input) can be repeatedly allocated to the input
terminals.
Terminals X1 to X24 are digital inputs, and are allocated with corresponding functions based
on the input signals. All these terminals share the COM terminal. After the 24 V voltage is
input, the corresponding input terminal indicator becomes ON. The functions are described
as follows:
00: Invalid
Even if there is signal input to the terminal, the system has no response. You can allocate
this function to terminals that are not used to prevent mis-function.
01: Up leveling signal 02: Down leveling signal 03: Door zone signal
The NICE3000new system determines the elevator leveling position based on the leveling
sensor signal. The system supports three types of leveling configuration: single door zone
sensor, up/down leveling sensor, and door zone sensor plus the up/down leveling sensor.
- 148 -
If three leveling sensors are used, the system receives the up leveling signal, door zone
signal, and down leveling signal in sequence in the up direction, and receives down leveling
signal, door zone signal, and up leveling signal in sequence in the down direction.
If two leveling sensors (up leveling sensor and down leveling sensor) are used, the system
receives the up leveling signal and down leveling signal in sequence in the up direction, and
receives down leveling signal and up leveling signal in sequence in the down direction.
If the leveling signal is abnormal (stuck or unavailable), the system reports fault Err22.
04: Safety circuit feedback signal 05: Door lock circuit feedback signal
29: Safety circuit 2 feedback signal 31: Door lock circuit 2 feedback
signal
The safety circuit is important to safe and reliable running of the elevator, and the door lock
circuit ensures that the hall door and car door are closed before the elevator starts to run.
Valid feedback signals of the safety circuit and door lock circuit are necessary to elevator
running.
It is recommended that these signals are set to NO input. If they are set to NC input, the
system considers the input active even though there is no input. In this case, the actual state
of the safety circuit cannot be detected, which may cause potential safety risks.
06: RUN contactor feedback signal 07: Brake contactor feedback

signal 26: Brake contactor feedback 2 signal
The system sends commands to the RUN and brake contactors and automatically detects
the feedback from the RUN and brake contactors. If the commands and the feedback are
inconsistent, the system reports a fault.
08: Inspection signal 09: Inspection up signal 1 0 : I n s p e c t i o n d o w n

signal
When the Automatic/Inspection switch is set to the Inspection position, the elevator enters
the inspection state; in this case, the system cancels all automatic running including the
automatic door operations. When the inspection up signal or inspection down signal is valid,
the elevator runs at the inspection speed.
11: Fire emergency signal

When the fire emergency switch is turned on, the elevator enters the fire emergency state,
and immediately cancels the registered hall calls and car calls. The elevator stops at the
nearest floor without opening the door, and then directly runs to the fire emergency floor and
automatically opens the door after arrival.
12: Up limit signal 13: Down limit signal

The up limit signal and down limit signal are used as the stop switches at the terminal floor
to prevent over travel top terminal or over travel bottom terminal when the elevator runs over
the leveling position of the terminal floor but does not stop.
- 149 -
14: Overload signal

When the elevator load exceeds 110% of the rated load during normal use, the elevator
enters the overload state. Then the overload buzzer beeps, the overload indicator in the
car becomes ON, and the elevator door keeps open. The overload signal becomes invalid
when the door lock is applied. If the running with 110% of the rated load is required during
inspection, you can set F7-06 to 1 to allow overload running (note that this function has
potential safety risks and use it with caution).
It is recommended that the overload signal be set to NC input. If it is set to NO, the system
cannot detect the overload state when the overload switch is damaged or the connection
is broken, and the elevator running in this case may cause potential safety risks. It is also
recommended that the up limit signal, down limit signal, and slow-down signal are set to NC.
15: Full-load signal

When the elevator load is 80% to 110% of the rated load, the HOP displays the full-load state, and
the elevator does not respond to hall calls.
Note
When terminal X on the MCB is used for input of the overload and full-load signals, ensure that
F5-36 has been set to 0.
16: Up slow-down 1 signal 17: Down slow-down 1 signal

The slow-down signals are used to enable the elevator to stop at the slow-down speed when
the car position is abnormal, which is an important method to guarantee elevator safety. The
system automatically records the positions of the switches in group F3 during shaft auto-
tuning.
22: Shorting door lock circuit contactor feedback

It is the feedback signal when the door lock circuit is shorted at enabling of the function of
door pre-open upon arrival or re-leveling at door open for the elevator configured with the
pre-open module. This is to ensure safety during the elevator running.
23: Firefighter switch signal

It is the firefighter switch signal and is used to enable the firefighter running. After the
elevator returns to the fire emergency floor, the elevator enters the firefighter running state if
the firefighter signal is active.
24: Door machine 1 light curtain signal; 25: Door machine 2 light curtain
signal
They are used to detect the light curtain signals of door machine 1 and door machine 2 (if
existing).
- 150 -
27: UPS valid signal

It is the emergency running signal at power failure. If it is active, it indicates that the elevator
is running for emergency evacuation at power failure. For more details, see section 5.2.1.
28: Elevator lock signal

If this signal is active, the elevator enters the locked state, returns to the elevator lock floor
and does not respond to any calls until the signal becomes inactive. It has the same function
as the hall call elevator lock signal.
30: Shorting PMSM stator feedback signal

The shorting PMSM stator contactor protects the elevator from falling at high speed in the
case of brake failure. This signal is used to monitor whether the shorting PMSM stator
contactor is normal.
65: Door machine 1 safety edge signal; 66: Door machine 2 safety edge
signal
They are used to detect the safety edge signal state of door machine 1 and door machine 2
(if existing).
67: Motor overheat signal

If this signal remains active for more than 2s, the controller stops output and reports
fault Err39 to prompt motor overheat. After this signal becomes inactive, Err39 is reset
automatically and the system resumes to normal operation.
68: Earthquake signal

If this signal remains active for more than 2s, the elevator enters the earthquake stop state,
stops at the nearest landing floor and opens the door. Then the elevator starts running again
after the earthquake signal becomes inactive.
69: Back door forbidden signal

If double door machines are applied, it is used to prohibit the use of door machine 2.
70: Light-load signal

It is used for nuisance judgment in the anti-nuisance function. If Bit2 in F8-08 is set to 1,
the system performs nuisance judgment by using the light-load switch. 30% of rated load is
regarded as light load.
71: Half-load signal

It is used for allocation of elevators in parallel or group mode and judgment of the
emergency running direction at power failure.
72: Fire emergency floor switchover signal

The NICE3000new supports two fire emergency floors. By default, the elevator stops at fire
- 151 -
emergency floor 1 in fire emergency state. If this signal is active, the elevator stops at fire
emergency floor 2 in fire emergency state.

F5-25 CTB input type 0–511 320 - ★
It is used to define the input signal type (NO/NC) of the CTB by binary bit.
For example, the input signal types of the CTB of an elevator are set as follows:
Bit Parameter Name Default Bit Parameter Name Default

Bit0 Door machine 1 light curtain 0 Bit5 Door machine 2 close limit 0
Bit1 Door machine 2 light curtain 0 Bit6 Full-load signal (digital) 1
Bit2 Door machine 1 open limit 0 Bit7 Over-load signal (digital) 0
Bit3 Door machine 2 open limit 0 Bit8 Light-load signal (digital) 1
Bit4 Door machine 1 close limit 0 0: NC input; 1: NO input

F5-26 Y1 function selection 1 - ★
0–31
These parameters are used to set the functions of relay output terminals Y1 to Y6.
00: Invalid
The terminal has no function.
01: RUN contactor control; 02: Brake contactor control; 03: Shorting door
lock circuit contactor control
The terminal with one of these functions controls whether the contactor is opened or closed.
04: Fire emergency floor arrival signal feedback

In the fire emergency state, the system sends the feedback signal for monitoring after the
elevator stops at the fire emergency floor.
05: Door machine 1 open; 06: Door machine 1 close; 07: Door machine 2
open; 08: Door machine 2 close
The terminal with one of these functions is used to control open/close of door 1/2.
- 152 -
09: Brake and RUN contactors healthy

When the brake and RUN contactors operate properly (non-Err36/Err37 state), the system
sends the feedback signal for monitoring.
10: Fault state

The terminal with the function has output when the system is in the level-3, level-4 or level-5
fault state.
11: Running monitor

The terminal with the function has output when the controller is running.
12: Shorting PMSM stator contactor

When the shorting PMSM stator contactor is applied in synchronous motor, the terminal with
the function is used to control whether the contactor is closed or opened. For details, see
section 5.2.1.
13: Emergency evacuation automatic switchover

When detecting that the bus voltage declines to a certain value after power failure occurs on
the mains supply, the controller outputs this signal and uses the battery for temporary power
supply, implementing emergency evacuation running.
Only Y6/M6 can be allocated with this function because the controller needs to depend on
its residual power to drive the relay at power failure of the mains supply.
14: System healthy

The terminal with the function has output when the system operates properly.
15: Emergency buzzer control

The terminal with the function has output when the system is in the emergency evacuation
running state. The buzzer tweets to prompt.
16: High-voltage startup of brake

This function is used for the brake that keeps the release state with voltage reduction. The
terminal with this function keeps the output for 4s to release the brake, and then the voltage
is reduced to keep the brake release state.
17: Elevator running in up direction

The terminal with the function has output when the elevator runs in the up direction.
18: Lamp/Fan running

It is used for the lamp/fan running output, the same as the energy saving control output of
the CTB.
- 153 -
19: Medical sterilization

It is used to control the output of the ultraviolet sterilizing lamp signal. After the elevator
stops running and the lamp/fan stops operating, the medical sterilization output is started.

The terminal with this function has output when the elevator stops at the non-door zone.
21: Electric lock

It is used to control applying and releasing of the electric lock in the case of manual door.

It is output when the elevator is in the non-service state and cannot respond to hall calls.

Communication Monitoring of CANbus and
F5-32 - - ●
state display Modbus communication states
It is used to monitor the state of CANbus communication with the CTB and Modbus
communication with the HOP.
When you enter the menu of F5-32, the LEDs on the operation panel indicate the current
HOP communication state. The LEDs are arranged as 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 from left to right.
Figure 7-4 Communication state monitoring
5 4 3 2 1
A A A A
F B F B F B F B
G G G G
E C E C E C E C
D DP D DP D DP D DP
Monitoring CANbus Monitoring Modbus communication status

communication status between the HOPs at all floors and the MCB
between the CTB and the MCB
Each segment of the LEDs is defined in the following table.
- 154 -
Table 7-2 Definition of LED segments
Corresponding Normal Modbus

Meaning of Segment ON
LED Communication Address of LED
No. HOP Modbus Communication
A B C D E F G DP
Normal
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A
F B
2 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 G
3 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 E C
4 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Reserved D DP
Corresponding Abnormal Modbus

Meaning of Segment OFF
LED Communication Address of LED
No. HOP Modbus Communication
A B C D E F G DP
Abnormal
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 A
2 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 F B
G
3 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 E C
4 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Reserved D DP
LED
CTB CANbus Communication State Number Displayed by the LED
No.
A
Best Communication
communication status interrupted
F B
G
5
E C
Communication status from strong to weak
D DP
For example, if the LEDs are shown as the following figure, it indicates that the Modbus
communication of addresses 1, 5, 6, 7, 12, 15, 16, 18, 19, 21, 22, 23, 25, 26 and 27
are abnormal. The Modbus communication of other addresses is normal. The CANbus
communication state displayed by the LED is 3, indicating normal communication.
- 155 -
Figure 7-5 Example of LED display indicating the communication state

25 17 9 1
30 26 22 18 14 10 6 2
31 23 15 7
29 27 21 19 13 11 5 3
28 20 24 12 16 4 8

F5-33 Terminal program control 0–65535 0 - ★
It is used to set the elevator functions. Whether a function is enabled is indicated by a binary
bit: "1" indicates that the function is enabled, and "0" indicates that the function is disabled.
The functions defined by the binary bits are described in the following table.
Table 7-3 Functions indicated by bits of F5-33
Bit Function Description Default

Elevator fire emergency If it is enabled, the fire emergency functions in
Bit3 requirement for Hong F6-44 applied to Hong Kong become enabled 0
Kong automatically.
Arrival gong disabled at The arrival gong is disabled from 22:00 p.m. to
Bit4 0
night 7:00 a.m.
Door lock disconnected at The door lock is additionally disconnected once
Bit6 inspection switched over when the inspection state is switched over to the 0
to normal running normal running state.
Fault code not displayed
Bit7 The keypad does not blink to display the fault code. 0
on the keypad
Door open command
The system immediately cancels the door open
Bit8 cancelled immediately at 0
command after receiving the door open limit.
door open limit
When the brake feedback is abnormal, the elevator
arrives at the door-zone position and stops. The
Car stop and zero-speed door keeps closed, and the system holds torque
Bit9 torque holding at abnormal output as long as possible. After the system is 0
brake feedback over-loaded, there is no torque output, and the
elevator may fall in this case. Be cautious of using
this function.

Monitoring of I/O terminals
on MCB
Monitoring of I/O terminals
on CTB, CCB and HOP
- 156 -
These parameters are used to monitor the state of all I/O terminals of the system.
The LEDs of F5-34/F5-35 are arranged as 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 from left to right.
Figure 7-6 Monitoring of all I/O terminals
5 4 3 2 1
A A A A A
F B F B F B F B F B
G G G G G
E C E C E C E C E C
D DP D DP D DP D DP D DP
Each segment of the LEDs is defined in the following table.

Table 7-4 Definition of LED segments
F5-34 F5-35
No. Segment Indication No. Segment Indication
A - A Light curtain 1
B Up leveling signal B Light curtain 2
C Down leveling signal C Door 1 open limit
D Door zone signal D Door 2 open limit
1 1
E Safety circuit feedback 1 E Door 1 close limit
F Door lock circuit feedback 1 F Door 2 close limit
G RUN contactor feedback G Full-load signal
DP Brake contactor feedback 1 DP Overload signal
A Inspection signal A Door open button
B Inspection up signal B Door close button
C Inspection down signal C Door open delay button
D Fire emergency signal D Bypass signal
2 2
E Up limit signal E Attendant signal
F Down limit signal F Direction change signal
G Overload signal G Independent running signal
DP Full-load signal DP Firefighter operation signal
- 157 -
F5-34 F5-35
No. Segment Indication No. Segment Indication
A Up slow-down 1 signal A Door open output 1
B Down slow-down 1 signal B Door close output 1
C Up slow-down 2 signal C Door lock signal
D Down slow-down 2 signal D Door open output 1
3 E Up slow-down 3 signal 3 E Door close output 2
F Down slow-down 3 signal F Door lock signal
G G Up arrival gong
contactor feedback
DP Firefighter running signal DP Down arrival gong
A Door machine 1 light curtain A Door open button display
B Door machine 2 light curtain B Door close button display
C Brake contactor feedback 2 C Door open delay button display
D UPS input D Non-door zone stop
4 E Elevator lock input 4 E Reserved
F Safety circuit feedback 2 F Buzzer output
Shorting PMSM stator
G G Reserved
contactor feedback
DP Door lock circuit feedback 2 DP Energy saving sign
A Reserved A System light curtain state 1
B RUN contactor output B System light curtain state 2
C Brake contactor output C Hall call elevator lock input
Shorting door lock circuit 5
D D Hall call fire emergency input
5 contactor control
Fire emergency floor arrival
E E Full-load signal
signal
F - F Over-load signal
DP - DP -

F5-36 Load cell input selection 0–3 1 - ★
It is used to set the channel of setting the elevator load cell signal. When a load cell device
is used, set this parameter correctly first.
•• 0: Invalid
•• 1: CTB digital input
•• 2: CTB analog input
•• 3: MCB analog input
- 158 -

F5-37 X25 function selection 0: No function 0 - ★
F5-38 X26 function selection 4: Safety circuit signal 0 - ★
F5-39 X27 function selection 5: Door lock circuit signal 0 - ★
These parameters are used to set the functions of heavy-current detection input terminals
X25 to X27.
The functions 0, 4, and 5 can be repeatedly allocated to terminals. If X25 to X27 are not
used, cancel the setting of these parameters.
Group F6: Basic Elevator Parameters

F6-00 Top floor of the elevator F6-01 to 40 9 - ★
F6-01 Bottom floor of the elevator 1 to F6-00 1 - ★
These two parameters are used to set the top floor and bottom floor of the elevator,
determined by the number of actually installed leveling plates.

F6-02 Parking floor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★
When the idle time of the elevator exceeds the value set in F9-00, the elevator returns to the
parking floor automatically.

F6-03 Fire emergency floor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★
When entering the state of returning to the fire emergency floor, the elevator returns to this
floor.

F6-04 Elevator lock floor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★
When entering the elevator lock state, the elevator returns to this floor.

F6-05 Service floors 1 0–65535 (floors 1–16) 65535 - ★
These parameters are used to set the service floors among floors 1–40. F6-05 (Service
floors 1) corresponds to floors 1–16. F6-06 (Service floors 2) corresponds to floors 17–32.
F6-35 (Service floors 3) corresponds to floors 33–40.
Set these parameters as follows:
- 159 -
Whether service floors of a parameter are allowed is indicated by a 16-bit binary number.
The 16 bits respectively correspond to 16 floors from low to high. "1" indicates that the
elevator will respond to calls of this floor, and "0" indicates that the elevator will not respond
to calls of this floor.
For example, the service floors of a 16-floor elevator are listed in the following table.
Table 7-5 Service floors of a 16-floor elevator
Bit Floor Whether Service Setting Bit Floor Whether Service Setting
Bit0 Floor 1 Allowed 1 Bit8 Floor 9 Forbidden 0

Bit1 Floor 2 Forbidden 0 Bit9 Floor 10 Allowed 1
Bit2 Floor 3 Allowed 1 Bit10 Floor 11 Allowed 1
Bit3 Floor 4 Allowed 1 Bit11 Floor 12 Forbidden 0
Bit7 Floor 8 Forbidden 0 Bit15 Floor 16 Allowed 1
The binary number indicated by the preceding table is 1111011001111101. The decimal
equivalent of this binary number is 63101. Then set F6-05 to 63101.

F6-07 1–8 1 - ★
group mode
F6-08 Elevator No. 1–8 1 - ★
These parameters are used to set the number of elevators and elevator No. in group/parallel
mode.
Note
•• If F6-07 is set to 1, the setting of F6-08 becomes invalid.

•• Elevator No.1 is the master elevator in parallel mode and completes the most parallel logics.

F6-09 Elevator program control 0–65535 0 - ★
It is used to select the required elevator functions. Whether a function is enabled is indicated
by a binary bit: "1" indicates that the function is enabled, and "0" indicates that the function
is disabled.
- 160 -

In single elevator or parallel mode, if this function
is enabled, an idle elevator will not return to the
base floor.
Bit0 Dispersed waiting 0
In group mode, this function is used together with
the group control board to implement dispersed
waiting.
Parallel implemented This function is enabled when the parallel mode
Bit2 0
at monitoring port is implemented at the RS232 serial port.
Parallel implemented This function is enabled when parallel mode is
Bit3 0
at CAN2 implemented at CAN2.
This function is used when the NICE3000 is
Parallel control in
included in the group control system. The setting
Bit4 compatibility with 0
of this bit must be the same as that for all the
NICE3000
other elevators in the group.
The displayed floor number is cleared before the
Clear floor number elevator reaches the target floor.
Bit6 and display direction 0
in advance If the elevator needs to change the direction, the
changed direction is displayed in advance.
It is applied to applications where there is only
Bit8 Single hall call button 0
one hall call button.
Err30 judgment at re- It indicates Err30 judgment when re-leveling is
Bit10 0
leveling cancellation cancelled.
If the states of safety circuits 1 and 2 or the states
Time interval
of door lock circuits 1 and 2 are inconsistent,
detection of safety
Bit14 the system will prohibit running. After the states 0
circuit 2 and door lock
restore normal, the system is powered on again
circuit 2
and starts running.

F6-10 Leveling sensor filter time 10–50 14 ms ★
It indicates the delay time from the moment when the leveling sensor acts to the moment
when the leveling signal becomes active. You need not modify it.

F6-11 Elevator function selection 0–65535 8448 - ★
It is used to set the elevator functions. "1" indicates that the function is enabled, and "0"
indicates that the function is disabled.
- 161 -

Disabling returning
The function of returning to base floor for verification
Bit1 to base floor for 0
due to large deviation of the car position is disabled.
verification
Cancelling auto
sequential arrange If the display of a floor in group FE is set to 1, the
Bit2 of hall call floor following floors to be displayed are automatically 0
addresses to be arranged in the ascending order.
displayed
The controller performs output current detection when
Current detection
the synchronous motor is started up. If the current is
Bit5 valid at startup for 0
abnormal, the output will be locked and the running will
synchronous motor
be forbidden.
Reversing MCB After this function is enabled, the MCB lamp output logic
Bit6 0
lamp output is reversed.
Door open valid at In the inspection state, you can open/close the door by
Bit7 non-door zone in pressing the door open/close button at the non-door 0
the inspection state zone.
Door open and
The elevator door opens and closes once after the
close once after
Bit8 system turns from first-time inspection to normal 1
inspection turned to
running.
normal
Buzzer not tweet The buzzer inside the car does not tweet upon re-
Bit10 0
upon re-leveling leveling.
The controller cannot perform shaft-tuning if the floor
Super short floor
Bit11 height is less than 500 mm. After this function is 0
function
enabled, shaft-tuning can be performed normally.
The controller automatically resets the faults once every
Bit12 Fault auto reset 0
hour.
When Err53 is reported, if the conditions of door open

Err53 fault auto limit valid and door lock release are satisfied, the
Bit13 1
reset controller resets Err53 automatically. A maximum of
three times of auto reset is allowed.
If this function is enabled, the up slow-down 1 signal

Up slow-down not
does not reset floor display. The down slow-down 1
Bit14 reset for super short 0
signal still resets floor display. This is valid only when
floor
the customized super short floor function is enabled.
If this function is enabled, the down slow-down 1 signal
Down slow-down
does not reset floor display. The up slow-down 1 signal
Bit15 not reset for super 0
still resets floor display. This is valid only when the
short floor
customized super short floor function is enabled.

F6-12 VIP floor 0 to F6-00 0 - ★
It is used to set the VIP floor. For details, see section 5.2.4.
- 162 -

F6-13 Security floor 0 to F6-00 0 - ★
It is used to set the security floor of the elevator. If the security signal is active or it is during
the night security period, the elevator runs to the security floor first every time, stops and
opens the door, and then runs to the target floor.
The elevator can be made to stop at the security floor in the following two ways:
•• Fd-07/Fd-08 is set to 5 (Security signal). If the security signal is active, the elevator
enters the security state.
•• The night security floor function is enabled (FE-32 Bit5 = 2), the elevator enters the
security state from 22:00 p.m. to 6:00 a.m.

Start time of down
F6-14 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
End time of down
F6-15 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
Start time of down
F6-16 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
End time of down
F6-17 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
These four parameters define the time periods of down collective selective 1 and down
collective selective 2, during which, the elevator responds to only downward hall calls.

Start time of time-based
F6-18 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
floor service 1
F6-19 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
floor service 1
F6-20 0–65535 65535 - ☆
F6-21 0–65535 65535 - ☆
F6-36 0–65535 65535 - ☆
Start time of time-based
F6-22 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
floor service 2
F6-23 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
floor service 2
F6-24 0–65535 65535 - ☆
F6-25 0–65535 65535 - ☆
F6-37 0–65535 65535 - ☆
- 163 -
These parameters define the time periods of two groups of time-based services and
corresponding service floors.
Service floor 1 corresponds to floors 1–16, service floor 2 corresponds to floors 17–32, and
service floor 3 corresponds to floors 33–30.
In the time period of time-based service 1 (set by F6-18 and F6-19), the elevator responds to the
service floors set by F6-20, F6-21 and F6-36 but ignores the service floors set by F6-05, F6-06
and F5-35. The setting of time-based service floors is the same as that of service floors in F6-05.
Note
During the time-based floor service period, the settings of F6-05, F6-06 and F5-35 are invalid.
If the two periods of time-based floor service 1 and time-based floor service 2 are overlapped, the
system implements time-based floor service 1 because it has higher priority level.

F6-28 Peak 1 floor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★
F6-31 Peak 2 floor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★
These parameters define two peak time periods in parallel mode and corresponding floors.
During a peak time period, if there are more than three car calls from the peak floor, the
elevator enters the peak service state. At the moment, the car calls from the peak floor are
valid all the time. The elevator returns to this floor if it is idle.

F6-38 Elevator lock start time 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
F6-39 Elevator lock end time 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
These two parameters define the elevator lock time period, during which automatic elevator
lock has the same effect as elevator lock by means of the elevator lock switch.

F6-40 Program control selection 1 0–65535 0 - ★
These parameters are used to set program control functions. "1" indicates that the function
is enabled, and "0" indicates that the function is disabled.
- 164 -
Table 7-8 Functions indicated by the bits of F6-40 to F6-42
F6-40 Program Control Selection 1

Bit0 Disability function It is used to enable or disable the disability function. 0
When the up slow-down and down leveling signals are
active and the up leveling signal is inactive, the system
Bit1 Soft limit function 0
considers that the up limit is performed. It is the same
for the down limit signal.
This function is enabled if the opposite door function is
JP16 input used as used. When JP16 has input, the elevator opens only
Bit2 0
back door selection the back door. When IP16 has no input, the elevator
opens only the front door.
JP16 input used as
Bit3 the back door open JP16 is used for the input of the back door open signal. 0
signal
This function is enabled only in the opposite door
control mode 2 (hall call independent, opposite-door
Opening only one manual control). In this case, only one door opens
door of opposite each time while the other door must stay in the door
Bit4 0
doors under manual close limit state.
control In group Fd, the HCB-B extended input includes
"Single/Double door selection". If this input is active,
both doors open if there is a car call.
Bit5 Timed elevator lock F6-38/F6-39 is valid only when this function is enabled. 0
Bit6 Manual door This function is used for the elevator with manual door. 0
When this function is enabled, the system enters the
Elevator lock/Fire
elevator lock or returning to fire emergency floor state
Bit7 emergency under 0
if the elevator lock input or fire emergency input at any
hall call at any floor
floor is active.
Bit8 Reserved - 0
The system clears all the current car calls every time
Disabling reverse the elevator changes the direction by default. When
Bit9 0
floor number clear this function is enabled, the function of clearing reverse
floor numbers is disabled.
Displaying next
The next floor to be arrived at is displayed during
Bit10 arriving floor 0
elevator running.
number
Responding to car The system responds to hall calls only after executing
Bit11 0
calls first all car calls.
Car call assisted
You can set the auxiliary command terminal (CN8)
command in single
Bit12 on the CTB for input of the disability calls (folding 0
door used as
command not required).
disability function
- 165 -

Folding command It is valid only when the function of Bit14 is enabled.
used as disability
Bit13 Bit13 = 1: Disability 0
function and back
door function Bit13 = 0: Back door
There are two folding methods when this function is
enabled:
A. CN7 is used for front door calls or ordinary calls,
Car call command
Bit14 and CN8 is used for back door calls or disability calls. 0
folding
B. For CN7 and CN8, inputs 1 to 16 are used for front
door calls or ordinary calls, and inputs 17 to 32 are
used for back door calls or disability calls.
JP20 used for
JP20 is used for input of switchover between the front
Bit15 switchover to back 0
door and the back door.
door

Bit0 Reserved - 0
Bit1 Reserved - 0
Inspection to stop During inspection running, if the slow-down 1 acts, the
Bit2 0
due to slow-down 1 system decelerates to stop.
Bit3 Reserved - 0
Buzzer tweet during The buzzer will tweet when the door open delay time
Bit4 0
door open delay set in Fb-14 is reached.
Bit5 Reserved - 0
Cancelling door Door open delay is cancelled when the door open
Bit6 0
open delay delay button is pressed again.
Bit7 Reserved - 0
Elevator lock at door In the elevator lock state, the elevator keeps the door
Bit8 0
open open at the elevator lock floor.
Display available at In the elevator lock state, hall calls are is displayed
Bit9 0
elevator lock normally.
Elevator lock in the
Bit10 The elevator is locked properly in the attendant state. 0
attendant state
The car display blinks when the elevator arrives at a
Bit11 Blinking at arrival 0
floor. The blinking advance time is set in F6-47.
Door re-open during The door re-opens if the door open delay input is
Bit12 0
door open delay active during door close.
Door re-open after
The door re-opens if the car call of the present floor is
Bit13 car call of the 0
valid during door close.
present floor
- 166 -
Bit0 Reserved - 0
Cancelling door
open/close If this function is enabled, the door open/close
Bit1 command at delay command is cancelled at the delay of 1s after door 0
after door open/ open/close limit.
close limit
On normal conditions, the system determines that the
Not judging door door is completely closed only when the door close
Bit2 lock state at door limit signal is active and the door lock is applied. 0
close output If this function is enabled, the system need not judge
the door lock state.
Door close
The door close command is output continuously during
Bit3 command output 0
the elevator running.
during running

F6-43 Attendant function selection 0–65535 0 - ★
It is used to select the attendant-related elevator functions. "1" indicates that the function is
enabled, and "0" indicates that the function is disabled.
Table 7-9 Attendant-related functions indicated by bits of F6-43
F6-43 Attendant Function Selection

Calls cancelled after
All car calls and hall calls are cancelled after the system
Bit0 entering attendant 0
enters the attendant state for the first time.
state
Not responding to The car blinks inside, prompting there is hall call, but
Bit1 0
hall calls the system does not respond.
Attendant/Automatic If this function is enabled, the setting of F5-00
Bit2 0
state switchover (Attendant/Normal switchover time) is valid.
The elevator door closes after the attendant presses the
Bit3 Door close at jogging 0
door close button manually.
It is the same as the normal state. After the door open
Bit4 Automatic door close 0
holding time is reached, the door closes automatically.
Buzzer tweet at
When the hall call floor and the car call floor are
Bit5 intervals in attendant 0
different, the buzzer tweets 2.5s at intervals.
state
Continuous buzzer
When the hall call floor and the car call floor are
Bit6 tweet in attendant 0
different, the buzzer tweets continuously.
state
- 167 -

Fire emergency
F6-44 0–65535 0 - ★
function selection
It is used to select the fire emergency functions. "1" indicates that the function is enabled,
and "0" indicates that the function is disabled.
Table 7-10 Fire emergency functions indicated by bits of F6-44
F6-44 Fire Emergency Function Selection

Bit0 to
Reserved - 0
Bit2
Arrival gong output
The arrival gong is output in the inspection or fire
Bit3 in inspection or fire 0
emergency state.
emergency state
Multiple car calls Multiple car calls can be registered in the fire
Bit4 registered in fire emergency state. Otherwise, only one car call can be 0
emergency state registered.
Retentive at power In the fire emergency state, the current system and
Bit5 failure in fire car state will be memorized at power failure and be 0
emergency state resumed after the system is powered on again.
In the fire emergency state, the door close process
Closing door by
can be completed only by holding down the door close
Bit6 holding down the door 0
button until the door close limit is reached. Otherwise,
close button
it will be switched over to door open automatically.
To implement door close at low speed in fire
Door close at low
Bit7 emergency state, wiring to the CTB for output of door 0
speed
close at low speed needs to be added.
Door close at car call The elevator enters the door close process
Bit8 0
registering automatically if a car call is registered.
Displaying hall calls in
Bit9 Hall calls are displayed in the fire emergency state. 0
fire emergency state
Bit10 Reserved - 0
Exiting fire emergency The system can exit the fire emergency state only
Bit11 0
state for firefighter after the elevator arrives at the fire emergency floor.
Bit12 Reserved - 0
Bit13 Reserved - 0
In the fire emergency state, the door open process
Opening door by
can be completed only by holding down the door open
Bit14 holding down the door 0
button until the door open limit is reached. Otherwise,
open button
it will be switched over to door close automatically.
Automatic door open The door opens automatically after the elevator arrives
Bit15 0
in fire emergency floor at the fire emergency floor.
- 168 -

F6-45 0–65535 0 - ★
function selection
It is used to select the emergency evacuation-related functions. "1" indicates that the
function is enabled, and "0" indicates that the function is disabled.
Table 7-11 Emergency evacuation functions indicated by bits of F6-45
F6-45 Emergency Evacuation Function Selection

Load direction Direction
Bit0 0 Automatically 1 1 0
Direction determining (based of nearest
calculating
determine mode on load cell data or landing
Bit1 0 direction 0 half-load signal) 0 floor 0
During evacuation running, the elevator arrives at the
Stopping at
evacuation parking floor set in F6-49 (it must be a non-zero
Bit2 evacuation 0
value and is a service floor). Otherwise, the elevator stops
parking floor
at the nearest floor.
Door open at During evacuation running, when the elevator arrives at
Bit3 single leveling the target floor and a leveling signal is active, the elevator 0
signal decelerates to stop.
Compensation at The non-load-cell startup is still valid in the process of
Bit4 0
startup evacuation running.
Bit5 to
Reserved - 0
Bit7
If the elevator does not arrive at the required floor after
Emergency 50s emergency evacuation running time, Err33 is reported.
Bit8 running time In this case, the function of switching over shorting stator 0
protection braking mode to controller drive based on the time setting
cannot be implemented.
Bit9 Reserved - 0
Emergency The buzzer tweets at intervals in the emergency evacuation
Bit10 0
buzzer output running state.
Bit11 Reserved - 0
Shorting stator
braking mode It enables the function of switching over shorting stator
Bit12 0
switched over to braking mode to controller drive.
controller drive
- 169 -
F6-45 Emergency Evacuation Function Selection

Time setting
Mode of shorting 0 If the time of the shorting stator braking mode exceeds
stator braking 50s, the controller starts to drive the elevator.
Bit13 mode switched Speed setting 0
over to controller
1 If the speed is still smaller than the value of F6-48
drive
after 10s in the shorting stator braking mode, the
controller starts to drive the elevator.
The system exits emergency evacuation when
0 receiving the door open limit signal from the elevator
Emergency that arrives at the target floor.
Bit14 evacuation exit 0
mode The system exits emergency evacuation when
1 receiving the door close limit signal from the elevator
that arrives at the target floor.
Function
selection of It enables the function. When this function is enabled, the
Bit15 0
shorting stator setting of related function codes becomes effective.
braking mode

F6-46 VIP function selection 0–65535 0 - ★
It is used to select the elevator VIP function. "1" indicates that the function is enabled, and
"0" indicates that the function is disabled.
Table 7-12 VIP functions indicated by bits of F6-46
F6-46 VIP Function Selection

VIP enabled by hall After this function is enabled, the system enters VIP
Bit0 0
call (at VIP floor) running.
VIP enabled by After the terminal for VIP hall call becomes ON, the
Bit1 0
terminal system enters VIP running.
Bit2-Bit7 Reserved - 0
Number of VIP car If this function is enabled, only one car call can be
Bit8 0
calls limited selected simultaneously in the VIP state.

F6-47 Blinking advance time 0.0–15.0 0 s ☆
It is used to set the blinking advance time when the elevator arrives the floor required by the
car call.
- 170 -

F6-48 0.010–0.630 0.010 m/s ★
switching speed
It is used to set the switching speed at shorting stator braking mode switched over to
controller drive via speed setting.

F6-49 Evacuation parking floor 0 to F6-01 0 s ★
It is used to set the evacuation parking floor when Bit2 (Stopping at evacuation parking floor)
in F6-45 is enabled.
Group F7: Test Function Parameters

This group of parameters is specialized for elevator commissioning.
Follow the instructions for normal-speed commissioning:
1. Before the commissioning, ensure that the shaft is unobstructed and the related
parameters have been set properly.
2. Run the elevator to the middle floor of the shaft at the inspection speed so as to prevent
wrong running direction.
3. Perform single-floor command commissioning and then perform multi-floor command
commissioning.
4. After the commissioning is complete, check that the parameters in this group are set
properly.

F7-00 Car call floor registered 0 to F6-00 0 - ☆
F7-01 Up call floor registered 0 to F6-00 0 - ☆
F7-02 Down call floor registered 0 to F6-00 0 - ☆
These parameters are used to set the destination floors at elevator commissioning or
repairing. They can be respectively used as the car call button, hall call up button and hall
call down button. They remain valid after the commissioning command is input, and become
invalid until they are set to 0 or the system suffers power failure.

F7-03 Random running times 0–60000 0 - ☆
It is used to set the random running times of the system.

new
The NICE3000 has the random automatic running function. If the setting of F7-03 is
greater than 60000, the system keeps implementing random automatic running until you set
F7-03 to 0.
You can set the time interval between two times of random running in F7-08.
- 171 -

0: Yes
F7-04 Hall call enabled 0 - ☆
1: No
It is used to enable the hall call function.

•• 0: Yes (hall call allowed)
•• 1: No (hall call forbidden)

0: Yes
F7-05 Door open enabled 0 - ☆
1: No
It is used to enable the door open function.

•• 0: Yes (door open allowed)
•• 1: No (door open forbidden)
Note
Continuous running of the elevator without opening the door accelerates overheating of the
controller module. Long-time use in such mode may cause overheat protection, and therefore, use
the function with caution.

0: Disabled
F7-06 Overload function 0 - ☆
1: Enabled
It is used to enable the overload function.
Note
This function is used only in the heavy-load test. Once the test is complete, prohibit over-load
running immediately.

0: Enabled
F7-07 Limit switch 0 - ☆
1: Disabled
It is used to enable the limit switch function.
Note
The limit switch is disabled only in the test of the final limit switch. Use the function with caution.

F7-08 Time interval of random running 0–1000 0 s ☆
It is used to set the time interval between two times of random running.
- 172 -
Group F8: Enhanced Function Parameters

F8-00 Load for load cell auto-tuning 0–100 0 % ★
It is used to set the load for load cell auto-tuning.

To perform load cell auto-tuning, do as follows:
1. Ensure that F8-01 is set to 0 and F5-36 is set to 2 or 3 to make the system allow load
cell auto tuning.
2. Stop the elevator at any floor, with the car in the no-load state. Set F8-00 to 0 and press
the ENTER key.
3. Put N% load in the car. Then set F8-00 to N and press the ENTER key.
For example, if you put 500 kg load in the elevator with rated load of 1000 kg, set F8-00
to 50.
After the load-cell auto-tuning is completed, the corresponding no-load and full-load data
will be recorded in F8-06 and F8-07. You can also manually input the data according to the
actual situation.

F8-01 Pre-torque selection 0–2 0 - ★
It is used to set the pre-torque compensation mode at startup of the elevator.

•• 0: Pre-torque invalid
Load cell auto-tuning is allowed.
•• 1: Load cell pre-torque compensation
With a load cell, the system implements the pre-torque compensation function.
•• 2: Automatic pre-torque compensation
The system automatically adjusts the compensated torque at startup without a load cell.
If F8-01 is set to 1, the system outputs the torque matching the load in advance to ensure
the riding comfort at startup. The output torque is limited by F2-08 (Torque upper limit).
When the load torque is greater than the set torque upper limit, the output torque of the
system is the torque upper limit.

F8-02 Pre-torque offset 0.0–100.0 50.0 % ★
It is used to set the pre-torque offset. It is actually the balance coefficient of the elevator,
indicating the percentage of the car load to the rated load when the counterweight and the
car weight are balanced.
- 173 -

F8-03 Drive gain 0.00–2.00 0.60 - ★
F8-04 Brake gain 0.00–2.00 0.60 - ★
These two parameters are used to set the pre-torque gain when the elevator runs on the
drive side or the brake side.
For details, see section 5.1.5.

F8-05 Current car load 0–1023 0 - ●
This parameter is readable and reflects the load situation in the car. The value is sampled by
the NICE3000new by using a load cell. This parameter is used to judge overload or full-load,
or calculate the torque current for load cell pre-torque compensation.

F8-06 Car no-load load 0–1023 0 - ★
F8-07 Car full-load load 0–1023 100 - ★
These two parameters respectively specify the car no-load load and full-load load. They are AD
sampling values.
Note
If F8-06 = F8-07, the full-load and over-load become invalid.

F8-08 Anti-nuisance function 0, 1, 2, 4 0 - ☆
It is the criteria for judging whether nuisance exists.

•• 0: Anti-nuisance function disabled
•• 1: Nuisance judged by load cell
A load cell is required. The system judges whether nuisance exists by comparing the
load cell data and the number of car calls.
•• 2: Nuisance judged by light curtain
The system determines that nuisance exists when the light curtain does not act after the
elevator stops at arrival for three consecutive times.
•• 4: Nuisance judged by light-load signal
If the light-load signal is active, the system determines that nuisance exists when the
number of car calls is greater than a certain value.
When the system determines that the elevator is in the nuisance state, it cancels all car
calls. In this case, call calls need to be registered again.
- 174 -

F8-09 0.000–0.100 0.050 m/s ★
operation speed at power failure
It is used to set the speed for emergency evacuation operation at power failure.

F8-10 0–2 0 - ★
operation mode at power failure
It is used to set the emergency evacuation operation mode at power failure.

•• 0: Motor not running
•• 1: UPS
•• 2: 48 V battery power supply
For details, see section 5.2.1.

F8-11 Brake apply delay 0.000–1.000 0.600 s ★
It is used to set the time from the moment when the system sends the brake apply command
to the moment when the brake is completely applied. For details, see Figure 7-3.

F8-12 Fire emergency floor 2 0 to F6-00 0 - ★
It is used to set the second fire emergency floor. The switchover between fire emergency
floor 1 and fire emergency floor 2 is implemented by means of input from the MCB. When
this signal is input, the elevator enters the fire emergency state and returns to this floor.

Start address of hall call
F8-16 0–40 0 - ☆
auxiliary command
It is used to set the start address of hall calls from the back door.
Address of a hall call from the back door = Address of a hall call from the front door at the
same floor + F8-16

F8-17 Hall call address check 0–1 0 - ☆
If it is valid, the HCB no longer displays the current floor information of the car but displays
the set address of itself, convenient for inspection in the case of wrong floor address setting.
- 175 -
Group F9: Time Parameters

Idle time before
F9-00 0–240 10 min ☆
returning to base floor
It is used to set the idle time of the elevator before returning to the base floor.
When the idle time of the elevator exceeds the setting of this parameter, the elevator returns
to the base floor.
If this parameter is set to 0, it becomes invalid.

Time for fan and lamp
F9-01 0–240 2 min ☆
to be turned off
It is used to set the time that fan and lamp stays ON before being turned off automatically.
If there is no running command in the automatic running state, the system turns off the fan
and lamp automatically after the time set in this parameter.
If this parameter is set to 0, it becomes invalid.

F9-02 Motor running time limit 0–45 45 s ★
It is used to set the running time limit of the motor.

In normal running state, if the continuous motor running time in the same direction between
two adjacent floors exceeds the setting of this parameter but no leveling signal is received,
the system will perform protection.
This parameter is mainly used for over-time protection in the case of steel rope slipping on
the traction sheave.
If this parameter is set to a value smaller than 3s, it becomes invalid.

F9-03 Clock: year 2000–2100 Current year YYYY ☆
F9-04 Clock: month 1–12 Current month MM ☆
F9-05 Clock: day 1–31 Current day DD ☆
F9-06 Clock: hour 0–23 Current hour HH ☆
F9-07 Clock: minute 0–59 Current minute MM ☆
These parameters are used to set the current date and time of the system.
Timekeeping is supported at power failure. You need to set the current system time correctly
so that functions related to the time can be implemented.
- 176 -

F9-09 Accumulative running time 0–65535 0 h ●
F9-11 High byte of running times 0–9999 0 - ●
F9-12 Low byte or running times 0–9999 0 - ●
These parameters are used to view the actual accumulative running time and running times
of the elevator.
Running times of the elevator = F9-11 x 10000 + F9-12.
Group FA: Keypad Setting Parameters

FA-00 Keypad display selection 0–3 3 - ☆
new
The NICE3000 system has three buttons and three 7-segment LEDs on the MCB. You
can change the display content through the setting of this parameter.
•• 0: Reversed display of physical floor
•• 1: Positive display of physical floor
•• 2: Reversed display of hall call floor
•• 3: Positive display of hall call floor

FA-01 Display in running state 1–65535 65535 - ☆
It is used to set the running parameters displayed on the keypad when the elevator is in the
running state.
A total of 16 running parameters can be displayed during running, each respectively
corresponding to the 16 binary bits of FA-01. "1" indicates that the parameter is displayed,
while "0" indicates that the parameter is not displayed. You can switch over the displayed
parameter by pressing the shift button and set whether to display this parameter according
to your own using habit.
The 16 binary bits correspond to the running parameters listed in the following table.
Table 7-13 Running parameters corresponding to 16 bits of FA-01

Bit0 Running speed 1 Bit8 Output terminal 1
Bit1 Set speed 1 Bit9 Current floor 1
Bit2 Bus voltage 1 Bit10 Current position 1
Bit3 Output voltage 1 Bit11 Car load 1
Bit4 Output current 1 Bit12 CTB input state 1
Bit5 Output frequency 1 Bit13 CTB output state 1
Bit6 Input terminal low bits 1 Bit14 System state 1
Bit7 Input terminal high bits 1 Bit15 Pre-toque current 1
- 177 -

FA-02 Display in stop state 1–65535 65535 - ☆
It is used to set the parameters displayed on the keypad when the elevator is in the stop
state.
A total of 16 parameters can be displayed at stop. The use is the same as that of FA-01.
The 16 binary bits correspond to the stop parameters listed in the following table.
Table 7-14 Stop parameters corresponding to 16 bits of FA-02

1 Slow-down distance at 1
Bit0 Running speed Bit8
rated speed
Bit1 Bus voltage 1 Bit9 CTB input state 1
Bit2 Input terminal low bits 1 Bit10 CTB output state 1
Bit3 Input terminal high bits 1 Bit11 System state 1
Bit4 Output terminal 1 Bit12 Reserved 0
Bit5 Current floor 1 Bit13 Reserved 0
Bit6 Current position 1 Bit14 Reserved 0
Bit7 Car load 1 Bit15 Reserved 0
new
The running and stop parameters of the NICE3000 system are the important references
for engineers to perform commissioning on site. The parameters are described as follows:
1) Running speed: indicates the actual running speed of the elevator.
Its maximum value is F0-03 (Maximum running speed), in unit of m/s.
2) Set speed: indicates the set speed of the NICE3000new system during elevator running.
It is the running speed calculated by the system theoretically at which the elevator
should run. Its unit is m/s.
3) Bus voltage: indicates the DC bus voltage of the NICE3000new system, in unit of m/s.
4) Output voltage: indicates the effective value of the equivalent voltage of the PWM wave
output by the NICE3000new system, in unit of V.
5) Output current: indicates the effective value of the actual current when the NICE3000new
system drives the motor to turn, in unit of A.
6) Output frequency: indicates the actual frequency of the motor during running. It has a
fixed corresponding relationship with the running speed. The unit is Hz.
7) Input terminal low bits: indicate the meaning of input terminals by bit. "1" indicates that
the signal is active.
A total of 16 bits are defined as below:
- 178 -
Bit Meaning Bit Meaning

BIT0 Reserved BIT8 Inspection signal
BIT1 Up leveling signal BIT9 Inspection up signal
BIT2 Down leveling signal BIT10 Inspection down signal
BIT3 Door zone signal BIT11 Fire emergency signal
BIT4 Safety circuit feedback 1 BIT12 Up limit signal
BIT5 Door lock circuit feedback 1 BIT13 Down limit signal
BIT6 RUN contactor feedback BIT14 Overload signal
BIT7 Brake contactor feedback 1 BIT15 Full-load signal
8) Input terminal high bits: indicate the meaning of input terminals by bit. "1" indicates that
the signal is active.

BIT0 Up slow-down 1 signal BIT8 Door machine 1 light curtain
BIT1 Down slow-down 1 signal BIT9 Door machine 2 light curtain
BIT2 Up slow-down 2 signal BIT10 Brake output feedback 2
BIT3 Down slow-down 2 signal BIT11 UPS input
BIT4 Up slow-down 3 signal BIT12 Elevator lock input
BIT5 Down slow-down 3 signal BIT13 Safety circuit feedback 2
Shorting door lock circuit Synchronous motor self-locked
BIT6 BIT14
contactor output feedback feedback
BIT7 Motor overheat signal BIT15 Door lock circuit feedback 2
9) Output terminal: indicates the meaning of output terminals by bit. "1" indicates that the
signal is active.

BIT0 Reserved BIT8 Door machine 2 close
BIT1 RUN contactor output BIT9 Contactor healthy
BIT2 Brake contactor output BIT10 Fault state
Shorting door lock circuit contactor
BIT3 BIT11 System in running state
output
BIT4 Fire emergency floor arrival signal BIT12 Reserved
BIT5 Door machine 1 open BIT13 Reserved
BIT6 Door machine 1 close BIT14 Reserved
BIT7 Door machine 2 open BIT15 Emergency leveling buzzer output
- 179 -
10) Current floor: indicates the information of the physical floor where the elevator is
located. It is the same as the value of F4-01.
11) Current position: indicates the absolute distance from the current elevator car to the
leveling flag of the first floor, in unit of m.
12) Car load: indicates the percentage of the car load to the rated load judged by the
NICE3000new system based on data from the sensor, in unit of %.
13) CTB input state: indicates the meaning of CTB inputs by bit. "1" indicates that the signal
is active.

BIT0 Light curtain 1 BIT8 Door open button
BIT1 Light curtain 2 BIT9 Door close button
BIT2 Door open limit 1 BIT10 Door open delay button
BIT3 Door open limit 2 BIT11 Direct travel ride signal
BIT4 Door close limit 1 BIT12 Attendant signal
BIT5 Door close limit 2 BIT13 Direction change signal
BIT6 Full-load signal BIT14 Independent running signal
BIT7 Overload signal BIT15 Firefighter operation signal
14) CTB output state: indicates the meaning of CTB outputs by bit. "1" indicates that the
signal is active.

BIT0 Door open output 1 BIT8 Door open button display
BIT1 Door close output 1 BIT9 Door close button display
BIT2 Door lock signal BIT10 Door open delay button display
BIT3 Door open output 2 BIT11 Non-door zone stop
BIT4 Door close output 2 BIT12 Reserved
BIT5 Door lock signal BIT13 Buzzer output
BIT6 Up arrival gong signal BIT14 Reserved
BIT7 Down arrival gong signal BIT15 Energy saving signal
15) System state: indicates the system state by bit. "1" indicates that the signal is active.
- 180 -

BIT0 Light curtain state 1 BIT8 Car state:
BIT1 Light curtain state 2 BIT9 1: Door open
BIT2 Hall elevator lock (indicated on HCB) BIT10 2: Door open holding
3: Door close
BIT3 Hall fire emergency (indicated on HCB) BIT11 4: Door close limit
5: Running
BIT4 Elevator state: BIT12 Full-load
BIT5 0: Inspection BIT13 Overload
BIT6 1: Shaft auto-tuning BIT14 Reserved
3: Return to base floor at fire
emergency
BIT7 4: Firefighter operation BIT15 Reserved

6: Attendant operation
7: Automatic (normal)
16) Pre-torque current: indicates the percentage of the pre-torque current compensated by
the NICE3000new system at startup to the rated current, in unit of %.

FA-03 Current encoder angle 0.0–359.9 0.0 Degree (°) ●
It displays the real-time encoder angle. This parameter cannot be modified.

FA-05 Control board software 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-06 Drive board software 0–65535 0 - ●
These two parameters respectively display the program version number of the logic control
board and the drive control board.

FA-07 Heatsink temperature 0–100 0 °C ●
It displays the current temperature of the heatsink.

Normally, the heatsink temperature is below 40°C. When the heatsink temperature is too
high, the system lowers the carrier frequency automatically to reduce heat dissipation. When
the heatsink temperature rises to a certain value, the system reports the module overheat
fault and stops running.

FA-11 Pre-torque current 0.0–200.0 0 % ●
It displays the percentage of pre-torque current to the rated current (positive/negative

display, indicating driving or braking).
- 181 -

FA-12 Logic information 0–65535 0 - ●
It displays the elevator status parameters.

The LEDs are arranged as 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 from left to right. LED 1 shows the state of door 1.
LEDs 2 and 3 have no display. LEDs 4 and 5 together show the elevator state.
Figure 7-7 Elevator state display
5 4 3 2 1
The LEDs are defined in the following table.

Table 7-15 LED display of the elevator state
LED 5 LED 4 LED 3 LED 2 LED 1

No No
Elevator State Door 1 State
Display Display
00 Inspection state 8 Elevator lock 0 Waiting state
Idle elevator
01 Shaft auto-tuning 09 1 Door open state
parking
Re-leveling at
02 Micro-leveling 10 2 Door open limit
inspection speed
Returning to Emergency
03 base floor at fire 11 evacuation 3 Door close state
emergency operation - -
Firefighter
04 12 Motor auto-tuning 4 Door close limit
operation
05 Fault state 13 Keypad control - -
Attendant
06 14 Base floor check - -
operation
07 Automatic running 15 VIP state - -

FA-13 Curve information 0–65535 0 - ●
It displays the system running curve information. LEDs 5, 4 and 3 have no display, while
LEDs 2 and 1 show the running curve information.
- 182 -

No No No
Curve Information
Display Display Display
00 Standby state 09 Deceleration start segment
Zero-speed start Linear deceleration
01 10
segment segment
Zero-speed holding
02 11 Deceleration end segment
segment
03 Reserved 12 Zero speed at stop
04 Startup speed stage 13 Current stop phase
- - -
Acceleration start
05 14 Reserved
segment
Linear acceleration
06 15 Stop data processing
segment
Acceleration end
07 16-20 Auto-tuning stage
segment
Stable-speed running
08 21 Emergency operation
segment

FA-14 Set speed 0.000–4.000 0 m/s ●
FA-15 Feedback speed 0.000–4.000 0 m/s ●
FA-16 Bus voltage 0–999.9 0 V ●
FA-17 Present position 0.00–300.0 0 m ●
FA-18 Output current 0.0–999.9 0 A ●
FA-19 Output frequency 0.00–99.99 0 Hz ●
FA-20 Torque current 0.0–999.9 0 A ●
FA-21 Output voltage 0–999.9 0 V ●
FA-22 Output torque 0–100 0 % ●
FA-23 Output power 0.00–99.99 0 kW ●
These parameters display the current performance state parameters of the system (the
output torque and output power supports positive/negative display).

FA-24 Communication interference 0–65535 0 - ●
It displays the current communication quality of the system, as described in the following
table.
- 183 -
Table 7-16 Communication quality display

SPI CAN2 Modbus CAN1
No
Communication Communication Communication Communication
Display
Quality Quality Quality Quality
0 Good 0 Good 0 Good 0 Good
· · · · · · · ·
-
· · · · · · · ·
9 Interrupted 9 Interrupted 9 Interrupted 9 Interrupted
0–9 indicates the communication quality. The greater the number is, the larger interference
the communication suffers and the poorer the communication quality is.

FA-26 Input state 1 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-27 Input state 2 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-28 Input state 3 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-30 Input state 5 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-31 Output state 1 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-32 Output state 2 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-33 Car input state 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-34 Car output state 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-35 Hall sate 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-36 System state 1 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-37 System state 2 0–65535 0 - ●
The following figure shows an example of the displayed input states.
Figure 7-8 Example of input state display
5 4 3 2 1
A A
F B F B
G G
E C E C
D D
DP DP
Each segment indicates a

Function code State function code.
As shown in the preceding figure, the LEDs from right to left are numbered 1, 2, 3, 4, and
5. For FA-26 to FA-37, LEDs 5 and 4 shows the function No.; LED 3 shows whether the
function is valid (1) or invalid (0); the 16 segments of LEDs 1 and 2 show the states of the
16 functions in this parameter. According to the figure, LEDs 5, 4, and 3 show that function
10 (Inspection down) is 1 (Valid); LEDs 1 and 2 show that besides function 10, functions
4 (Safety circuit feedback), 5 (Door lock circuit feedback), 6 (RUN contactor feedback), 7
(Brake contactor feedback), and 8 (Inspection signal) are valid.
- 184 -
FA-26 Input state 1 FA-28 Input state 3

No. Function No. Function No. Function No. Function
Fire
emergency
0 Reserved 8 Inspection signal 64 Reserved 72
floor
switchover
Door 1 safety
1 Up leveling signal 9 Inspection up 65 73 Reserved
edge signal
Down leveling Door 2 safety
2 10 Inspection down 66 74 Reserved
signal edge signal
Fire emergency Motor overheat
3 Door zone signal 11 67 75 Reserved
signal signal
Safety circuit Earthquake
4 12 Up limit signal 68 76 Reserved
feedback signal
Door lock circuit Back door
5 13 Down limit signal 69 77 Reserved
feedback forbidden
RUN contactor
6 14 Overload signal 70 Light-load 78 Reserved
feedback
Brake contactor
7 15 Full-load signal 71 Half-load 79 Reserved
feedback
FA-27 Input state 2 FA-30 Input state 5
Up slow-down 1 Door machine 1
16 24 0 Reserved 8 Reserved
signal light curtain
Down slow-down 1 Door machine 2
signal light curtain
Up slow-down 2 Brake contactor
signal feedback 2
Down slow-down 2
19 27 UPS input 3 Reserved 11 Reserved
signal
High-voltage
Up slow-down 3 Elevator lock
20 28 4 safety circuit 12 Reserved
signal input
signal
High-voltage
Down slow-down 3 Safety circuit 2
21 29 5 door lock 13 Reserved
signal signal
circuit signal
Shorting door lock Shorting motor
22 circuit contactor 30 stator contactor 6 Reserved 14 Reserved
feedback feedback
Firefighter running Door lock circuit
signal 2 feedback
- 185 -
FA-31 Output state 1 FA-32 Output state 2

High-voltage
0 Reserved 8 Door 2 close 16 startup of 24 Reserved
brake
Brake and RUN Elevator
RUN contactor
1 9 contactors 17 running in up 25 Reserved
output
healthy direction
Brake contactor Fault state Lamp/Fan
2 10 18 26 Reserved
output above level 3 output
Shorting door lock
Medical
3 circuit contactor 11 Running state 19 27 Reserved
sterilization
output
Shorting motor
Fire emergency Non-door zone
4 12 stator contactor 20 28 Reserved
floor arrival stop
output
Power failure
Electric lock
5 Door 1 open 13 emergency 21 29 Reserved
output
output
Non-service
6 Door 1 close 14 System healthy 22 30 Reserved
state
Emergency
7 Door 2 open 15 23 Reserved 31 Reserved
leveling tweet
FA-33 Car input state FA-34 Car output state

Down arrival
0 Reserved 8 Overload input 0 Reserved 8
gong
Light-load
1 Door 1 light curtain 9 1 Door 1 open 9 Reserved
input
2 Door 2 light curtain 10 Reserved 2 Door 1 close 10 Reserved
Forced door
3 Door 1 open limit 11 Reserved 3 11 Reserved
close 1
4 Door 2 open limit 12 Reserved 4 Door 2 open 12 Reserved
5 Door 1 close limit 13 Reserved 5 Door 2 close 13 Reserved
Forced door
6 Door 2 close limit 14 Reserved 6 14 Reserved
close 2
7 Full-load input 15 Reserved 7 Up arrival gong 15 Reserved
- 186 -
FA-35 Hall state

0 Reserved 4 VIP signal 8 Reserved 12 Reserved
1 Elevator lock signal 5 Reserved 9 Reserved 13 Reserved
Fire emergency Door close
signal button input
Current floor
3 7 Reserved 11 Reserved 15 Reserved
forbidden
FA-36 System state 1 FA-37 System state 2
Door open 2 Up direction
0 Door open 1 button 8 0 8 Reserved
button display
Door close 2 Down direction
1 Door close 1 button 9 1 9 Reserved
button display
2 Door open delay 1 10 Door open 2 2 Running state 10 Reserved
Direct travel ride System full-
3 11 Reserved 3 11 Reserved
switch load
System
4 Attendant switch 12 Reserved 4 12 Reserved
overload
Direction change System half-
switch load
Independent System light-
running switch load
Fire emergency 2
7 15 Reserved 7 Reserved 15 Reserved
switch

FA-46 Hall call communication state 1 0–65535 0 - ●
These parameters display the communication state between HCBs of all floors and the
MCB.
FA-46, FA-47, and FA-48 respectively indicate the communication state of floors 1 to 16,
17 to 32, and 33 to 40. As shown in Figure 7-4, LEDs 5 and 4 show the floor address; LED
3 show whether the communication for this floor address is normal ("1" is displayed) or
interrupted ("0" is displayed). The communication quality can be viewed from LEDs 1 and
2: The 16 segments show the communication state of 16 floor addresses; ON indicates that
the communication is normal, and OFF indicates that the communication is interrupted.
- 187 -
Group Fb: Door Function Parameter

Fb-00 Number of door machine (s) 1–2 1 - ★
It is used to set the number of door machine(s).

Set this parameter based on actual conditions.

Fb-01 CTB software 00–999 0 - ●
It displays the software of the CTB connected to the controller.

Fb-02 0–65535 65535 - ☆
machine 1
Fb-03 0–65535 65535 - ☆
machine 1
Fb-18 0–65535 65535 - ☆
machine 1
Fb-04 0–65535 65535 - ☆
machine 2
Fb-05 0–65535 65535 - ☆
machine 2
Fb-19 0–65535 65535 - ☆
machine 2
These parameters are used to set the service floors of door machine 1 and door machine 2.
Service floors 1 correspond to floors 1–16; service floors 2 correspond to floors 17–32;
service floors 3 correspond to floors 33–48. The setting method is the same as that for F6-
05.

Fb-06 Door open protection time 5–99 10 s ☆
It is used to set the door open protection time.

After outputting the door open command, if the system does not receive the door open limit
signal after the time set in this parameter, the system re-opens the door. When the door
open/close times reach the value set in Fb-09, the system reports fault Err48.

Fb-07 Arrival gong output delay 0–1000 0 ms ☆
When the value of this parameter is larger than 10 and the car display is switched over to
the destination floor, the system outputs the arrival gong after the time set in this parameter.
If the value is smaller than 10, the system outputs the arrival gong at stop.
- 188 -

Fb-08 Door close protection time 5–99 15 s ☆
It is used to set the door close protection time.

After outputting the door close command, if the system does not receive the door close limit
signal after the time set in this parameter, the system re-closes the door. When the door
open/close times reach the value set in Fb-09, the system reports fault Err49.

Fb-09 Door re-open times 0–20 0 - ☆
It is used to set the door re-open/re-close times allowed when door open/close is abnormal.
Note
If this parameter is set to 0, it indicates that door re-open is not supported; in this case, the
elevator keeps opening/closing the door if it does not receive the door open/close limit signal.

Fb-10 Door state of standby elevator 0–2 0 - ☆
It is used to set the door state when the elevator is in stop and standby state.
•• 0: Closing the door as normal at base floor
•• 1: Waiting with door open at base floor
•• 2: Waiting with door open at each floor

Door open holding
Fb-11 1–1000 5 s ☆
time for hall call
It is used to set the door open holding time when there is a hall call. The elevator closes the
door immediately after receiving a door close command.

Door open holding
Fb-12 1–1000 3 s ☆
time for car call
It is used to set the door open holding time when there is a car call. The elevator closes the
door immediately after receiving a door close command.

Door open holding
Fb-13 1–1000 10 s ☆
time at base floor
It is used to set the door open holding time after the elevator arrives at the base floor. The
elevator closes the door immediately after receiving a door close command.
- 189 -

Fb-14 Door open delay 10–1000 30 s ☆
It is used to set the door open holding time when there is door open delay input. The
elevator closes the door immediately after receiving a door close command.

Fb-15 Special door open holding time 10–1000 30 s ☆
It is used to set the door open holding time when there is a disability call.

Fb-16 Manual door open holding time 1–60 5 s ☆
It is used to set the door open limit delay in the case of manual door. This parameter is valid
when the manual door function is used.

Holding time for
Fb-17 5–180 120 s ☆
forced door close
It is used to set the holding time before forced door close is implemented.
If the forced door close function is enabled, the system enters the forced door close state
and sends a forced door close signal when there is no door close signal after the time set in
this parameter is reached.
Group FC: Protection Function Parameters

Program control for
FC-00 0–65535 0 - ★
protection function
It is used to set program control related to protection functions. "1" indicates that the function
FC-00 Program control for protection function

Whether the motor is short-circuited to ground is
Short-circuit to
detected at power-on. If the motor is short-circuited to
Bit0 ground detection at 0
ground, the controller blocks the output immediately,
power-on
and reports the fault.
Bit1 Reserved - 0
During normal-speed running, the elevator decelerates
Decelerating to to stop immediately after the light curtain acts, and
Bit2 stop at valid light then runs to the registered destination floor after the 0
curtain light curtain restores. This function is mainly used in
the case of manual door.
- 190 -
FC-00 Program control for protection function

In this mode, the door open/close limit signal is not
required, and the system automatically judges door
Mode without door open/close limit. The system determines that door
Bit9 0
open/close limit open limit is implemented 3s after the door open
command is output and door close limit is implemented
3s after the door close command is output.

Program control 2 for
FC-01 0–65535 0 - ★
protection function
It is used to set program control related to protection functions. "1" indicates that the function
FC-01 Program control 2 for protection function

Bit0 Overload protection It sets whether to implement overload protection. 1
Canceling protection It sets whether to implement protection at output phase
Bit1 0
at output phase loss loss.
Light curtain
At door close limit, the door re-opens if the light curtain
Bit4 judgment at door 0
is valid.
close limit
Canceling SPI It sets whether to implement wire-breaking detection
Bit5 communication on SPI communication between the MCB and the drive 0
judgment board.
Canceling MCB
Bit6 It sets whether to implement MCB overspeed judgment . 0
overspeed judgment
Bit8 Reserved - 0
Canceling protection It sets whether to implement protection at input phase
Bit14 0
at input phase loss loss.

FC-02 Overload protection coefficient 0.50–10.00 1.00 - ★
After detecting that the output current exceeds (FC-02 x Rated motor current) and the
duration lasts the time specified in the inverse time lag curve, the system outputs fault Err11
indicating motor overload.

FC-03 Overload pre-warning coefficient 50–100 80 % ★
After detecting that the output current exceeds (FC-03 x Rated motor current) and the
duration lasts the time specified in the inverse time lag curve, the system outputs a pre-
warning signal.
- 191 -

FC-04 Opposite door selection 0–3 0 - ★
It is used to set opposite door-related control function.

•• 0: Simultaneous control
•• 1: Hall call independent, car call simultaneous
•• 2: Hall call independent, car call manual control
•• 3: Hall call independent, car call independent
For details on the use of the opposite door, see section 5.2.3.

FC-06 Designated fault 0–99 0 - ☆
It is used to designate the fault to be monitored.

The designated fault code is saved in parameters of FC-07 to FC-19, and will not be
overwritten.

FC-07 Designated fault code 0–9999 0 - ●
FC-08 Designated fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
Designated fault month
FC-09 0–1231 0 MM.DD ●
and day
Designated fault hour and
FC-10 0–23.59 0 HH.MM ●
minute
FC-11 0–65535 0 - ●
designated fault
FC-12 0–65535 0 - ●
designated fault
Set speed upon
FC-13 0.000–4.000 0 m/s ●
designated fault
Feedback speed upon
FC-14 0.000–4.000 0 m/s ●
designated fault
Bus voltage upon
FC-15 0.0–999.9 0 V ●
designated fault
FC-16 0.0–300.0 0 m ●
designated fault
Output current upon
FC-17 0.0–999.9 0 A ●
designated fault
FC-18 0.00–99.99 0 Hz ●
designated fault
Torque current upon
FC-19 0.0–999.9 0 A ●
designated fault
- 192 -

FC-20 1st fault code 0–9999 0 - ●
FC-21 1st fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
FC-22 1st fault month and day 0–1231 0 MM.DD ●
FC-23 1st fault hour and minute 0–23.59 0 HH.MM ●
FC-24 2nd fault code 0–9999 0 - ●
FC-25 2nd fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
FC-26 2nd fault month and day 0–1231 0 MM.DD ●
FC-27 2nd fault hour and minute 0–23.59 0 HH.MM ●
···
FC-56 10th fault code 0–9999 0 - ●
FC-58 10th fault month and day 0–1231 0 MM.DD ●
FC-59 10th fault hour and minute 0–23.59 0 HH.MM ●
These parameters record the latest 10 faults of the elevator.

The fault code is a 4-digit number. The two high digits indicate the floor where the car is
located when the fault occurs, and the two low digits indicate the fault code. For example,
the 1st fault code is 0835, indicating that when the 1st fault (fault Err35) occurs, the car is
near floor 8.
The fault subcode is used to locate the causes of the fault. The specific fault time is
recorded in month, day, hour and minute.

FC-60 Latest fault code 0–9999 0 - ●
FC-61 Latest fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
FC-62 Latest fault month and day 0–1231 0 MM.DD ●
FC-63 Latest fault hour and minute 0–23.59 0 HH.MM ●
FC-64 Logic information of latest fault 0–65535 0 - ●
FC-65 Curve information of latest fault 0–65535 0 - ●
FC-66 Set speed upon latest fault 0.000–4.000 0 m/s ●
Feedback speed upon latest
FC-67 0.000–4.000 0 m/s ●
fault
FC-68 Bus voltage upon latest fault 0.0–999.9 0 V ●
FC-69 Current position upon latest fault 0.0–300.0 0 m ●
FC-70 Output current upon latest fault 0–999.9 0 A ●
Output frequency upon latest
FC-71 0.00–99.99 0 Hz ●
fault
FC-72 Torque current upon latest fault 0.0–999.9 0 A ●
- 193 -
Group Fd: Communication Parameters

0: 9600
Fd-00 Baud rate 0 bit/s ★
1: 38400
0–127
Fd-02 Local address 1 - ★
0: Broadcast address
Communication
Fd-03 0–20 10 ms ★
response delay
Communication 0.0–60.0
Fd-04 0.0 s ★
timeout 0: Invalid
These RS232 serial port communication parameters are used for communication with the
monitor software in the host computer.
•• Fd-00 specifies the baud rate for serial communication. Fd-02 specifies the current
address of the controller. The setting of these two parameters must be consistent with
the setting of the serial port parameters on the host computer.
•• Fd-03 specifies the delay for the controller to send data by means of the serial port.
•• Fd-04 specifies the communication timeout time of the serial port. Transmission of each
frame must be completed within the time set in Fd-04; otherwise, a communication fault
occurs.

Fd-05 Re-leveling stop delay 0.00–2.00 0.00 s ★
It is used to set the stop delay at re-leveling. After receiving the leveling signal during re-
leveling, the elevator stops after the delay set in this parameter.

0: Reserved
NO/NC input:
Fd-07 HCB:JP1 input 1/33: Elevator lock signal 1 - ★
2/34: Fire emergency signal
3/35: Current floor forbidden
4/36: VIP floor signal
5/37: Security floor signal
Fd-08 HCB:JP2 input 2 - ★
6/38: Door close button input
These parameters are used to set the functions of pins 2 and 3 of JP1 and JP2 on the HCB.
The setting is effective to the HCBs for all floors.
- 194 -

0: Invalid
1: Up arrival indicator
Fd-09 HCB:JP1 output 1 - ★
2: Down arrival indicator
3: Fault output
4: Non-door zone stop output
5: Non-service state output
Fd-10 HCB:JP2 output 2 - ★
6: Door close button indicator
output
These parameters are used to set the functions of pins 1 and 4 of JP1 and JP2 on the HCB. The
setting is effective to the HCBs for all floors.
Note
The output load capacity of the HCB is limited, with the output voltage of 24 V and the load power
not larger than 1 W.
Fd-11 HCB-B:JP1 input 0 - ★

0: Reserved
Fd-12 HCB-B:JP2 input NO/NC input: 0 - ★
3/35: Door 2 selection
4/36: Door 2 restricted
Fd-14 HCB-B:JP4 input (back door forbidden) 0 - ★
7/39: Single/double door
selection
These parameters are used to set the functions of pins 2 and 3 of JP1 to JP6 on the HCB-B
no-display parallel-serial conversion board. The setting is effective to all HCB-Bs connected
to the system.
- 195 -

Fd-17 HCB-B:A1 output 0 - ★
0: Reserved
Fd-18 HCB-B:A2 output 0 - ★
1: Fault output
Fd-19 HCB-B:B1 output 0 - ★
Fd-20 HCB-B:B2 output output 0 - ★
Fd-21 HCB-B:C1 output 3: Non-service state output 0 - ★
Fd-22 HCB-B:C2 output 4: Fire emergency output 0 - ★
Fd-23 HCB-B:C3 output 5: Power failure emergency 0 - ★
output
Fd-24 HCB-B:C4 output 0 - ★
6: Door lock valid
7: Night output signal
These parameters are used to set the functions of four relay outputs and six open-collector
outputs on the HCB-B no-display parallel-serial conversion board. The setting is effective to
all HCB-Bs connected to the system.
Group FE: Elevator Function Parameters

FE-00 Collective selective mode 0–2 0 - ★
It is used to set the collective selective mode of the system.

•• 0: Full collective selective
The elevator responds to both up and down hall calls.
•• 1: Down collective selective
The elevator responds to down hall calls but does not respond to up hall calls.
•• 2: Up collective selective
The elevator responds to hall up calls but does not respond to hall down calls.
- 196 -
Function Parameter
Setting Range Default Unit Property
Code Name
FE-01 Floor 1 display 00: Display "0" 22: Display "23" 1901 - ☆
FE-02 Floor 2 display 01: Display "1" 23: Display "C" 1902 - ☆
FE-03 Floor 3 display 02: Display "2" 24: Display "D" 1903 - ☆
FE-04 Floor 4 display 03: Display "3" 25: Display "E" 1904 - ☆
FE-05 Floor 5 display 04: Display "4" 26: Display "F" 1905 - ☆
FE-06 Floor 6 display 05: Display "5" 27: Display "I" 1906 - ☆
FE-07 Floor 7 display 06: Display "6" 28: Display "J" 1907 - ☆
FE-08 Floor 8 display 07: Display "7" 29: Display "K" 1908 - ☆
08: Display "8" 30: Display "N"
09: Display "9" 31: Display "O"
10: Display "A" 32: Display "Q"
Floor 11 to floor 30 display ···
11: Display "B" 33: Display "S"
12: Display "G" 34: Display "T"
13: Display "H" 35: Display "U"
FE-36 Floor 33 display 14: Display "L" 36: Display "V" 0303 - ☆
FE-37 Floor 34 display 15: Display "M" 37: Display "W" 0304 - ☆
FE-38 Floor 35 display 16: Display "P" 38: Display "X" 0305 - ☆
FE-39 Floor 36 display 17: Display "R" 39: Display "Y" 0306 - ☆
FE-40 Floor 37 display 18: Display "-" 40: Display "Z" 0307 - ☆
FE-41 Floor 38 display 19: No display 41: Display "15" 0308 - ☆
These parameters are used to set the display of each floor. The setting range is 0000–9999,
where the two high digits indicate the display code of the ten's digit, and the two low digits
indicate the display code of the unit's digit.

FE-54 Highest digit selection 3 0–4099 0 - ☆
These parameters are used to set special floor display.

When the 2-digit display cannot meet the requirement, you can add the third-digit display
by setting these parameters. In the values of these parameters, the two high digits indicate
the floor address that requires special display, and the two low digits indicate the display
content.
For example, if floor 18 needs to be displayed as "17A", set FE-18 to 0710 (display "7A"),
and then set the highest digit display, that is, FE-52 to 1801 (indicating that the highest digit
display of floor address 18 is "1").
- 197 -

FE-32 Elevator function selection 1 0–65535 34816 - ☆
FE-32 Elevator function selection 1

Bit0 Reserved - 0
Bit1 Reserved - 0
The elevator performs re-leveling at a low speed with
Re-leveling
Bit2 door open. An external shorting door lock circuit contactor 0
function
needs to be used together.
During normal stop, when the elevator speed is smaller
than a certain value and the door zone signal is active,
Door pre-open the system shorts the door lock by means of the shorting
Bit3 0
function door lock circuit contactor and outputs the door open
signal, implementing door pre-open. This improves the
elevator use efficiency.
The system automatically identifies the state of the hall
Stuck hall call
Bit4 call buttons. If the state is abnormal, the system cancels 0
cancellation
the stuck hall call.
From 10:00 p.m to 6:00 a.m., the elevator runs to the
Night security floor
Bit5 security floor first every time, stops and opens the door, 0
function
and then runs to the destination floor.
Down collective
Bit6 selective peak The peak service at down collective selective is used. 0
service
Parallel peak
Bit7 The peak service in parallel control is used. 0
service
Time-based
For details, see the description of related parameters in
Bit8 service floor 0
group F6.
function
Bit9 VIP function The VIP function is used. 0
Bit10 Reserved - 0
Bit11 Car call deletion A call can be deleted by pressing the button twice 1
Bit12 Hall call deletion consecutively. 0
Bit13 Reserved - 0
Bit14 Reserved - 0
Door lock short- After detecting the door lock short-circuit, the system
Bit15 1
circuit detection reports fault Err53.

FE-33 Elevator function selection 2 0–65535 36 - ☆
- 198 -
FE-33 Elevator Function Selection 2

Bit0 Reserved - 0
Door open holding The system still outputs the door open command
Bit1 0
at open limit upon door open limit.
Door close
command not The system stops outputting the door close
Bit2 1
output upon door command upon door close limit.
close limit
Bit3 Reserved - 0
If the feedback of the RUN and brake contactors is
abnormal, faults Err36 and Err37 are reported, and
Auto reset for you need to manually reset the system.
Bit4 RUN and brake 0
contactor stuck With this function, the system resets automatically
after the fault symptom disappears. A maximum of
three auto reset times are supported.
The system detects the state of slow-down switches.
Slow-down switch Once detecting that a slow-down switch is stuck,
Bit5 1
stuck detection the system instructs the elevator to slow down
immediately and reports a corresponding fault.
Bit6 Reserved - 0
If the door still does not close within the time set in
Fb-17 in automatic state, the system outputs the
Bit7 Forced door close 0
forced door close signal; at this moment, the light
curtain becomes invalid and the buzzer tweets.
NO shorting motor When Bit8 is set to 1, an NO shorting motor stator
Bit8 0
stator contactor contactor is used.
The elevator decelerates to stop immediately after
receiving a single leveling signal during re-leveling.
Immediate stop
Bit9 By default, when receiving a leveling signal, the 0
upon re-leveling
elevator stops after the re-leveling stop delay set in
Fd-05.
Bit10
to Reserved - 0
Bit12
A maximum allowable speed is set when the car is
High-speed
in the slow-down switch position. When the elevator
Bit13 elevator protection 0
exceeds the speed at the position, the system
function
outputs a protection signal.
Bit14 Reserved - 0
Opposite door
Bit15 independent For details, see section 5.2.3. 0
control
Group Fr: Leveling Adjustment Parameters

- 199 -
Leveling 0: Disabled
Fr-00 0 - ★
adjustment function 1: Enabled
This parameter is used to enable the leveling adjustment function.

Fr-01 Leveling adjustment record 1 30030 mm ★
00000–60060
… …
These parameters are used to record the leveling adjustment values. Each parameter
records the adjustment information of two floors, and therefore, the adjustment information
of 40 floors can be recorded totally.
The method of viewing the record is shown in the following figure.
Figure 7-9 Viewing the leveling adjustment record
Floor 1 Floor 2 Unit: mm
As shown in the preceding figure, the left two LEDs and the right two LEDs respectively
show the adjustment bases of floor 1 and floor 2. If the value is larger than 30, it is upward
leveling adjustment; if the value is smaller than 30, it is downward leveling adjustment. The
default value "30" indicates that there is no leveling adjustment. The maximum adjustment
range is ± 30 mm.
The leveling adjustment method is as follows:
17. Ensure that shaft auto-tuning is completed successfully, and the elevator runs properly
at normal speed.
18. Set Fr-00 to 1 to enable the car leveling adjustment function. Then, the elevator shields
hall calls, automatically runs to the top floor, and keeps the door open after arrival. If the
elevator is at the top floor, it directly keeps the door open.
19. Go into the car, press the top floor button, and the leveling position is changed 1 mm
upward; press the bottom floor button, and the leveling position is changed 1 mm
downward. The value is displayed in the car.
Positive value: up arrow + value, negative value: down arrow + value, adjustment range:
± 30 mm
20. After completing adjustment for the current floor, press the top floor button and bottom
floor button in the car at the same time to save the adjustment result. The car display
restores to the normal state. If the leveling position of the current floor need not be
adjusted, press the top floor button and bottom floor button in the car at the same time
- 200 -
to exit the leveling adjustment state. Then, car calls can be registered.
21. Press the door close button, and press the button for the next floor. The elevator runs
to the next floor and keeps the door open after arrival. Then, you can perform leveling
adjustment.
22. After completing adjustment for all floors, set Fr-00 to 0 to disable the leveling
adjustment function. Otherwise, the elevator cannot be used.
Pay attention to the following precautions during the operation:
1. Each time shaft auto-tuning is performed, all leveling adjustment parameters can be
cleared or reserved.
a. If you set F1-11 to 3 on the operator or F7 to 1 on the keypad, all leveling
adjustment parameters are reserved.
b. If you set F1-11 to 4 on the operator or F-7 to 2 on the keypad, all leveling
adjustment parameters are reserved.
2. When the re-leveling function is used, the leveling adjustment function is automatically
shielded and cannot be used.
Group FF: Factory Parameters
Group FP: User Parameters

FP-00 User password 0–65535 0 - ☆
It is used to set the user password.

If it is set to any non-zero number, the password protection function is enabled. After a
password has been set and taken effect, you must enter the correct password in order to
enter the menu. If the entered password is incorrect, you cannot view or modify parameters.
If FP-00 is set to 00000, the previously set user password is cleared, and the password
protection function is disabled.
Remember the password that you set. If the password is set incorrectly or forgotten, contact
Monarch to replace the control board.

FP-01 Parameter update 0–2 0 - ★
It is used to set processing on the parameters.

•• 0: No operation
•• 1: Restore default settings
•• 2: Clear fault records
If you set this parameter to 1 (Restore default settings), all parameters except group F1 are
- 201 -
restored to the default settings. Be cautions with this setting.
User-defined 0: Invalid
FP-02 0 - ★
parameter display 1: Valid
It is used to set whether to display the parameters that are modified.

When it is set to 1, the parameters that are different from the default setting are displayed.
- 202 -
8
EMC
EMC NICE3000new User Manual
Chapter 8 EMC
8.1 Definition of Terms

1. EMC
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) describes the ability of electronic and electrical
devices or systems to work properly in the electromagnetic environment and not to
generate electromagnetic interference that influences other local devices or systems.
In other words, EMC includes two aspects: The electromagnetic interference generated
by a device or system must be restricted within a certain limit; the device or system must
have sufficient immunity to the electromagnetic interference in the environment.
2. First environment
Environment that includes domestic premises, it also includes establishments directly
connected without intermediate transformers to a low-voltage power supply network
which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes
3. Second environment
Environment that includes all establishments other than those directly connected to a
low-voltage power supply network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes
4. Category C1 Controller
Power Drive System (PDS) of rated voltage less than 1 000 V, intended for use in the
first environment
PDS of rated voltage less than 1 000 V, which is neither a plug in device nor a movable
device and, when used in the first environment, is intended to be installed and
commissioned only by a professional
PDS of rated voltage less than 1 000 V, intended for use in the second environment and
not intended for use in the first environment
PDS of rated voltage equal to or above 1 000 V, or rated current equal to or above 400
A, or intended for use in complex systems in the second environment
8.2 Introduction to EMC Standard
8.2.1 Installation Environment

The system manufacturer using the controller is responsible for compliance of the system
with the European EMC directive. Based on the application of the system, the integrator
must ensure that the system complies with standard EN 61800-3: 2004 Category C2, C3 or
C4.
- 204 -
NICE3000new User Manual EMC
The system (machinery or appliance) installed with the controller must also have the CE
mark. The system integrator is responsible for compliance of the system with the EMC
directive and standard EN 61800-3: 2004 Category C2.
WARNING
If applied in the first environment, the controller may generate radio interference. Besides the
CE compliance described in this chapter, users must take measures to avoid such interference,
if necessary.
8.2 2 Requirements on Satisfying the EMC Directive

1. The controller requires an external EMC filter. The recommended filter models are listed
in Table 8-1. The cable connecting the filter and the controller should be as short as
possible and be not longer than 30 cm. Furthermore, install the filter and the controller
on the same metal plate, and ensure that the grounding terminal of the controller and
the grounding point of the filter are in good contact with the metal plate.
2. Select the motor and the control cable according to the description of the cable in
section 8.4.
3. Install the controller and arrange the cables according to the cabling and grounding in
section 8.4.
4. Install an AC reactor to restrict the current harmonics. For the recommended models,
see Table 8-2.
8.3 Selection of Peripheral EMC Devices
8.3.1 Installation of EMC Input Filter on Power Input Side

An EMC filter installed between the controller and the power supply can not only restrict the
interference of electromagnetic noise in the surrounding environment on the controller, but
also prevents the interference from the controller on the surrounding equipment.
The NICE3000new controller satisfies the requirements of category C2 only with an EMC filter
installed on the power input side. The installation precautions are as follows:
•• Strictly comply with the ratings when using the EMC filter. The EMC filter is category
I electric apparatus, and therefore, the metal housing ground of the filter should be
in good contact with the metal ground of the installation cabinet on a large area, and
requires good conductive continuity. Otherwise, it will result in electric shock or poor
EMC effect.
•• The grounds of the EMC filter and the PE conductor of the controller must be tied to the
same common ground. Otherwise, the EMC effect will be affected seriously.
•• The EMC filter should be installed as closely as possible to the power input side of the
controller.
The following table lists the recommended manufacturers and models of EMC filters for the
NICE3000new controller. Select a proper one based on actual requirements.
- 205 -
Table 8-1 Recommended manufacturers and models of EMC filter
Power Rated Input

AC Input Filter Model AC Input Filter Model
Controller Model Capacity Current
kVA A Changzhou Jianli (Schaffner)
Three-phase 380 V
NICE-L-C-4002 4.0 6.5 DL-10EBK5 FN 3258-7-44
NICE-L-C-4003 5.9 10.5 DL-16EBK5 FN 3258-16-33
NICE-L-C-4005 8.9 14.8 DL-16EBK5 FN 3258-16-33
NICE-L-C-4007 11.0 20.5 DL-25EBK5 FN 3258-30-33
NICE-L-C-4011 17.0 29.0 DL-35EBK5 FN 3258-30-33
NICE-L-C-4015 21.0 36.0 DL-50EBK5 FN 3258-42-33
NICE-L-C-4018 24.0 41.0 DL-50EBK5 FN 3258-42-33
NICE-L-C-4022 30.0 49.5 DL-50EBK5 FN 3258-55-34
NICE-L-C-4030 40.0 62.0 DL-65EBK5 FN 3258-75-34
NICE-L-C-4037 57.0 77.0 DL-80EBK5 FN 3258-100-35
NICE-L-C-4045 69.0 93.0 DL-100EBK5 FN 3258-100-35
NICE-L-C-4055 85 113 DL-130EBK5 FN3258-130-35
Three-phase 220 V
NICE-L-C-2002 4.0 11.0 DL-16EBK5 FN 3258-7-44
NICE-L-C-2003 5.9 17.0 DL-25EBK5 FN 3258-7-44
220-NICE-L-C-4007 17.0 29.0 DL-35EBK5 FN 3258-7-44

220-NICE-L-C-4011 21.0 36.0 DL-50EBK5 FN 3258-16-33
220-NICE-L-C-4015 24.0 41.0 DL-50EBK5 FN 3258-16-33
220-NICE-L-C-4018 30.0 40.0 DL-50EBK5 FN 3258-30-33
220-NICE-L-C-4022 40.0 49.0 DL-50EBK5 FN 3258-30-33
220-NICE-L-C-4030 57.0 61.0 DL-65EBK5 FN 3258-42-33
Single-phase 220 V
NICE-L-C-2002 2.3 13.2 DL-20TH1 FN2090-20-06
NICE-L-C-2003 3.4 17.0 DL-20TH1 FN2090-20-06
220-NICE-L-C-4007 9.8 29.0 DL-30TH1 FN2090-30-08
- 206 -
Power Rated Input

AC Input Filter Model AC Input Filter Model
Controller Model Capacity Current
kVA A Changzhou Jianli (Schaffner)
220-NICE-L-C-4011 12.1 36.0 DL-40K3
220-NICE-L-C-4015 13.9 41.0 DL-50T3

Consult the
220-NICE-L-C-4018 17.3 40.0 DL-50T3
manufacturer.
220-NICE-L-C-4022 23.1 49.0 DL-50T3
220-NICE-L-C-4030 33.0 61.0 DL-70TH1
8.3.2 Installation of AC Input Reactor on Power Input Side

An AC input reactor is installed to eliminate the harmonics of the input current. As an optional
device, the reactor can be installed externally to meet strict requirements of an application
environment for harmonics. The following table lists the recommended manufacturers and
models of input reactors.
Table 8-2 Recommended manufacturers and models of AC input reactors
Power Capacity Rated Input Current AC Input Reactor Model

Controller Model
kVA (A) (Inovance)
Three-phase 380 V
NICE-L-C-4002 4.0 6.5 MD-ACL-7-4T-222-2%
NICE-L-C-4003 5.9 10.5 MD-ACL-10-4T-372-2%
NICE-L-C-4005 8.9 14.8 MD-ACL-15-4T-552-2%
NICE-L-C-4007 11.0 20.5 MD-ACL-30-4T-113-2%
NICE-L-C-4011 17.0 29.0 MD-ACL-30-4T-113-2%
NICE-L-C-4015 21.0 36.0 MD-ACL-40-4T-153-2%
NICE-L-C-4018 24.0 41.0 MD-ACL-50-4T-183-2%
NICE-L-C-4022 30.0 49.5 MD-ACL-50-4T-183-2%
NICE-L-C-4030 40.0 62.0 MD-ACL-80-4T-303-2%
NICE-L-C-4037 57.0 77.0 MD-ACL-80-4T-303-2%
NICE-L-C-4045 69.0 93.0 MD-ACL-120-4T-453-2%
NICE-L-C-4055 85 113 MD-ACL-120-4T-453-2%
Three-phase 220 V
NICE-L-C-2002 4.0 11.0 MD-ACL-15-4T-222-2%
NICE-L-C-2003 5.9 17.0 MD-ACL-30-4T-222-2%
- 207 -
Power Capacity Rated Input Current AC Input Reactor Model

Controller Model
kVA (A) (Inovance)
220-NICE-L-C-4007 17.0 29.0 MD-ACL-30-4T-113-2%
220-NICE-L-C-4011 21.0 36.0 MD-ACL-50-4T-113-2%
220-NICE-L-C-4015 24.0 41.0 MD-ACL-50-4T-153-2%
220-NICE-L-C-4018 30.0 40.0 MD-ACL-50-4T-183-2%
220-NICE-L-C-4022 40.0 49.0 MD-ACL-50-4T-183-2%
220-NICE-L-C-4030 57.0 61.0 MD-ACL-80-4T-303-2%
Single-phase 220 V
NICE-L-C-2002 2.3 13.2
NICE-L-C-2003 3.4 17.0
220-NICE-L-C-4007 9.8 29.0
220-NICE-L-C-4011 12.1 36.0

Consult the manufacturer.
220-NICE-L-C-4015 13.9 41.0
220-NICE-L-C-4018 17.3 40.0
220-NICE-L-C-4022 23.1 49.0
220-NICE-L-C-4030 33.0 61.0
8.4 Shielded Cable
8.4.1 Requirements for the Shielded Cable

The shielded cable must be used to satisfy the EMC requirements. Shielded cables are
classified into three-conductor cable and four-conductor cable. If conductivity of the cable
shield is not sufficient, add an independent PE cable, or use a four-conductor cable, of
which one phase conductor is PE cable.
The three-conductor cable and four-conductor cable are shown in the following figure.
PE conductor Shield Shield

and shield
PE PE
The motor cable and PE shielded conducting wire (twisted shielded) should be as short
as possible to reduce electromagnetic radiation and external stray current and capacitive
current of the cable.
- 208 -
To suppress emission and conduction of the radio frequency interference effectively, the
shield of the shielded cable is cooper braid. The braided density of the cooper braid should
be greater than 90% to enhance the shielding efficiency and conductivity, as shown in the
following figure.
Insulation jacket Copper shield Copper braid Internal
insulator
Cable
core
It is recommended that all control cables be shielded. The grounding area of the shielded
cable should be as large as possible. A suggested method is to fix the shield on the metal
plate using the metal cable clamp so as to achieve good contact, as shown in the following
figure.
Shielded cable Metal plate

Metal cable clamp
The following figure shows the grounding method of the shielded cable.
Figure 8-1 Grounding of the shielded cable
The shield must

be grounded.
8.4.2 Installation Precautions of the Shielded Cable

•• Symmetrical shielded cable is recommended. The four-conductor shielded cable can
also be used as an input cable.
•• The motor cable and PE shielded conducting wire (twisted shielded) should be as
short as possible to reduce electromagnetic radiation and external stray current and
capacitive current of the cable. If the motor cable is over 100 meters long, an output
filter or reactor is required.
- 209 -
•• It is recommended that all control cables be shielded.

•• It is recommended that a shielded cable be used as the output power cable of the AC
drive; the cable shield must be well grounded. For devices suffering from interference,
shielded twisted pair (STP) cable is recommended as the lead wire and the cable shield
must be well grounded.
8.4.3 Cabling Requirement

1. The motor cables must be laid far away from other cables, with recommended distance
larger than 0.5 m. The motor cables of several controllers can be laid side by side.
2. It is recommended that the motor cables, power input cables and control cables be laid
in different ducts. To avoid electromagnetic interference caused by rapid change of the
output voltage of the controller, the motor cables and other cables must not be laid side
by side for a long distance.
3. If the control cable must run across the power cable, make sure they are arranged at an
angle of close to 90°. Other cables must not run across the controller.
4. The power input and output cables of the controller and weak-current signal cables
(such as control cable) should be laid vertically (if possible) rather than in parallel.
5. The cable ducts must be in good connection and well grounded. Aluminium ducts can
be used to improve electric potential.
6. The filter, controller and motor should be connected to the system (machinery or
appliance) properly, with spraying protection at the installation part and conductive metal
in full contact.
7. The controller must be connected to the cabinet properly, with spraying protection at the
installation part and conductive metal in full contact.
8. The filter must be connected to the cabinet properly, with spraying protection at the
installation part and conductive metal in full contact.
9. The motor should be connected to the system (machinery or appliance) properly, with
spraying protection at the installation part and conductive metal in full contact.
Figure 8-2 Cabling diagram
Power cable
Power cable
Min. 200 mm 90°
Min. 300 mm
Motor cable
Control cable
NICE3000new
integrated
elevator
controller
Control cable
90° Min. 500 mm

Braking resistor cable
Motor cable
Control cable Min. 500 mm

Power cable 90° Control cable
- 210 -
8.5 Solutions to Common EMC Interference Problems

The controller generates very strong interference. Although EMC measures are taken,
the interference may still exist due to improper cabling or grounding during use. When the
controller interferes with other devices, adopt the following solutions.
Interference Type Solution

•• Connect the motor housing to the PE of the controller.
Leakage protection •• Connect the PE of the controller to the PE of the mains power supply.
switch tripping •• Add a safety capacitor to the power input cable.
•• Add magnetic rings to the input drive cable.
•• Connect the PE of the controller to the PE of the mains voltage.
Controller •• Add a safety capacitor to the power input cable and wind the cable
interference during with magnetic rings.
running •• Add a safety capacitor to the interfered signal port or wind the signal
cable with magnetic rings.
•• Connect the equipment to the common ground.
•• Connect the PE of the controller to the PE of the mains voltage.
•• Add a safety capacitor to the power input cable and wind the cable
with magnetic rings.
Communication
interference •• Add a matching resistor between the communication cable source
and the load side.
•• Add a common grounding cable besides the communication cable.
•• Use a shielded cable as the communication cable and connect the
cable shield to the common grounding point.
•• Enlarge the capacitance at the low-speed DI. A maximum of 0.11 uF
capacitance is suggested.
I/O interference
•• Enlarge the capacitance at the AI. A maximum of 0.22 uF is
suggested.
- 211 -
- 212 -
9
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting NICE3000new User Manual
Chapter 9 Troubleshooting
9.1 Description of Fault Levels

The NICE3000new has almost 60 pieces of alarm information and protective functions. It
monitors various input signals, running conditions and feedback signals. If a fault occurs, the
system implements the relevant protective function and displays the fault code.
The controller is a complicated electronic control system and the displayed fault information
is graded into five levels according to the severity. The faults of different levels are handled
according to the following table.
Table 9-1 Fault levels
Category Action Remarks

1. Display the fault code.
1A. The elevator running is not affected on any
Level 1 2. Output the fault relay action condition.
command.
1. Display fault code. 2A. The parallel function is disabled.
2. Output the fault relay action
Level 2 command.
2B. The door pre-open/re-leveling function is
3. Continue normal running of disabled.
the elevator.
1. Display the fault code. 3A. In low-speed running, the elevator stops at
special deceleration rate, and cannot restart.
Level 3 command. 3B. In low-speed running, the elevator does
not stop. In normal-speed running, the elevator
3. Stop output and apply the
stops, and then can start running at low speed
brake immediately after stop.
after a delay of 3s.
4A. In low-speed running, the elevator stops
under special deceleration rate, and cannot
restart.
1. Display the fault code.
4B. In low-speed running, the elevator does
command.
Level 4 stops, and then can start running at low speed
3. In distance control, the after a delay of 3s.
elevator decelerates to stop
and cannot run again. 4C. In low-speed running, the elevator does
1. Display the fault code. 5A. In low-speed running, the elevator stops
immediately and cannot restart.
Level 5 command. 5B. In low-speed running, the elevator does
3. The elevator stops
immediately.
- 214 -
NICE3000new User Manual Troubleshooting
Note
•• A, B, and C are fault sub-category.

•• Low-speed running involves inspection, emergency evacuation, shaft auto-tuning, re-leveling,
motor auto-tuning, base floor detection, and running in operation panel control.
•• Normal-speed running involves automatic running, returning to base floor in fire emergency
state, firefighter operation, attendant operation, elevator lock, and elevator parking.
9.2 Fault Information and Troubleshooting

If an alarm is reported, the system performs corresponding processing based on the fault
level. You can handle the fault according to the possible causes described in the following
table.
Table 9-2 Fault codes and troubleshooting
Fault
Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Code
1. Check whether the RUN
contactor at the controller output
side is normal.
2. Check.
•• Whether the power cable jacket
is damaged
•• Whether the power cable is
possibly short circuited to ground
•• Whether the cable is connected
1. The main circuit
reliably
output is grounded or
short circuited. 3. Check the insulation of motor
power terminals, and check
Over-current 2. Motor auto-tuning is
WHETHER the motor winding is
Err02 during performed improperly. 5A
short-circuited or grounded.
acceleration 3. The load is too
4. Check whether the shorting
heavy.
PMSM stator contactor causes
4. The encoder signal controller output short circuit.
is incorrect.
5. Check whether motor parameters
comply with the nameplate.
6. Perform motor auto-tuning again.
7. Check whether the brake keeps
released before the fault occurs
and whether the brake is stuck
mechanically.
(To be continued)
- 215 -
Fault
Code
8. Check whether the balance
coefficient is correct.
1. The main circuit 9. Check whether the encoder
output is grounded or wirings are correct. For
short circuited. asynchronous motor, perform
2. Motor auto-tuning is SFVC and compare the current to
performed improperly. judge whether the encoder works
Over-current properly.
Err03 during 3. The load is too 5A
deceleration heavy. 10. Check:
4. The deceleration •• Whether encoder pulses per
rate is too short. revolution (PPR) is set correctly
5. The encoder signal •• Whether the encoder signal is
is incorrect. interfered with
•• Whether the encoder cable runs
through the duct independently
•• Whether the cable is too long
•• Whether the shield is grounded
at one end
•• 11. Check whether:
•• Whether the encoder is installed
1. The main circuit reliably
output is grounded or
short circuited. •• Whether the rotating shaft is
connected to the motor shaft
2. Motor auto-tuning is reliably
Over-current at performed properly.
Err04 •• Whether the encoder is stable 5A
constant speed 3. The load is too
during normal-speed running
heavy.
12. Check whether UPS feedback
4. The encoder is is valid in the non-UPS running
seriously interfered state (Err02).
with.
13. Check whether the acceleration/
deceleration rate is too high (Err02,
Err03).
(End)
- 216 -
Fault
Code
1. The input voltage is
too high.
2. The regeneration
power of the motor is 1. Adjust the input voltage. Observe
Over-voltage too high. whether the bus voltage is normal
Err05 during and whether it rises too quickly 5A
acceleration 3. The braking during running.
resistance is too large,
or the braking unit fails. 2. Check for the balance coefficient.
4. The acceleration rate 3. Select a proper braking
is too short. resistor and check whether the
resistance is too large based on the
1. The input voltage is recommended braking resistance
too high. table in chapter 3.
Over-voltage 2. The braking 4. Check:
Err06 during resistance is too large, 5A
•• Whether the cable connecting
deceleration or the braking unit fails.
the braking resistor is damaged
3. The deceleration
•• Whether the cooper wire touches
rate is too short.
the ground
1. The input voltage is •• Whether the connection is
too high. reliable
Over-voltage at
Err07 5A
constant speed 2. The braking
resistance is too large,
or the braking unit fails.
1. Check whether the external
power supply is stable and whether
the wiring of all power input cables
1. The external power is secure.
Pre-charge supply is instable. 2. Forbid frequently powering on
Err08 relay not close 5A
2. The hardware is the controller on the condition that
at power-on
faulty. the controller is not powered off
completely.
3. For the hardware fault, contact
the agent or Monarch.
1. Instantaneous power
1. Eliminate external power supply
failure occurs on the
faults and check whether the power
input power supply.
fails during running.
Err09 Under-voltage 2. The input voltage is 5A
2. Check whether the wiring of all
too low.
power input cables is secure.
3. The drive control
3. Contact the agent or Monarch.
board fails.
- 217 -
Fault
Code
1. Check the brake circuit and
1. The brake circuit is power input.
abnormal. 2. Reduce the load.
2. The load is too 3. Check whether the encoder
heavy. feedback signal and setting are
3. The encoder correct, and whether the initial
Controller feedback signal is angle of the encoder for the PMSM
Err10 4A
overload abnormal. is correct.
4. The motor 4. Check the motor parameter
parameters are setting and perform motor auto-
incorrect. tuning.
5. A fault occurs on the 5. Check the power cables of
motor power cables. the motor (refer to the solution of
Err02).
1. FC-02 is set
improperly.
1. Adjust the parameter (FC-02 can
2. The brake circuit is be set to the default value).
Err11 Motor overload 3A
abnormal.
2. Refer to the solution of Err10.
3. The load is too
heavy.
1. Check whether the three phases
1. The power input
of power supply are balanced
phases are not
Power supply and whether the power voltage is
Err12 symmetric. 4A
phase loss normal. If not, adjust the power
2. The drive control input.
board fails.
2. Contact the agent or Monarch.
1. The output wiring 1. Check the wiring.
of the main circuit is
Power output loose. 2. Check whether the contactor on
Err13 4A
phase loss the output side is normal.
2. The motor is
damaged. 3. Eliminate the motor fault.
1. Lower the ambient temperature.

1. The ambient
temperature is too high. 2. Clear the air filter.
Module
Err14 2. The fan is damaged. 3. Replace the damaged fan. 5A
overheat
3. The air filter is 4. Check whether the installation
blocked. clearance of the controller satisfies
the requirement.
1. The excitation 1. Check the circuit of the encoder.

current deviation is too 2. The output MCCB becomes OFF.
large. 3. The values of the current loop
Current control 2. The torque current parameters are too small.
Err16 5A
fault deviation is too large. 4. Perform motor auto-tuning
3. The torque limit is again if the zero-point position is
exceeded for a very incorrect.
long time. 5. Reduce the load if it too heavy.
- 218 -
Fault
Code
1. The deviation 1. Check whether the encoder runs
between the Z signal properly.
position and the
2. Check whether the encoder
Reference absolute position is too
wiring is correct and reliable.
signal of large.
Err17 3. Check whether the PG card 5A
the encoder 2. The deviation
incorrect wiring is correct.
between the absolute
position angle and the 4. Check whether the grounding of
accumulative angle is the control cabinet and the motor is
too large. normal.
Current The drive control board
Err18 Contact the agent or Monarch. 5A
detection fault fails.
1. Enter the motor parameters
correctly.
2. Check the motor wiring and
whether phase loss occurs on the
1. The motor cannot contactor at the output side.
rotate properly. 3. Check the encoder wiring and
Motor auto- 2. The motor auto- ensure that the encoder PPR is set
Err19 5A
tuning fault tuning times out. properly.
3. The encoder for the 4. Check whether the brake keeps
PMSM fails. released during no-load auto-
tuning.
5. Check whether the inspection
button is released before the PMSM
with-load auto-tuning is finished.
1. Check whether F1-00 is set
correctly.
1. The encoder model 2. Check the encoder wiring.
does not match the 3. If Err20 is reported in the stop
motor. state, check whether signal lines C,
Speed
2. The encoder wiring D of the SIN/COS encoder or signal
Err20 feedback 5A
is incorrect. lines U, V, W of the UVW encoder
incorrect
3. The current keeps are broken.
large during low-speed 4. Check whether the encoder is
running. stuck mechanically during running.
5. Check whether the brake keeps
released during running.
1. Check whether the leveling and
door zone sensors work properly.
2. Check the installation verticality
Leveling signal The leveling position and depth of the leveling plates.
Err22 1A
abnormal deviation is too large. 3. Check the leveling signal input
points of the MCB.
4. Check whether the steel rope
slips.
- 219 -
Fault
Code
The RTC clock 1. Replace the clock battery.
Err24 RTC clock fault information of the MCB 3B
is abnormal. 2. Replace the MCB.
Storage data The storage data of the

Err25 Contact the agent or Monarch. 4A
abnormal MCB is abnormal.
Check whether the earthquake

The earthquake signal
Earthquake signal is consistent with the
Err26 is active and the 3B
signal parameter setting (NC, NO) of the
duration exceeds 2s.
MCB.
1. Check whether the state (NO,

NC) of the feedback contact on
the contactor is consistent with the
parameter setting of the MCB.
2. Check whether the state of the
MCB output indicator is consistent
with the contactor action.
Shorting
The shorting PMSM 3. Check whether corresponding
PMSM stator
Err29 stator feedback is feedback contact acts after the 3B
feedback
abnormal. contactor acts, and whether the
abnormal
corresponding feedback input point
of the MCB acts correctly.
4. Check whether the shorting
PMSM stator contactor is consistent
with the MCB output feature.
5. Check the coil circuit of the
shorting PMSM stator contactor.
1. Check whether the up/down limit

switch acts during re-leveling.
1. The automatic 2. Check whether the leveling
running time of the signal cables are connected reliably
elevator is too long. and whether the signal copper
wires may touch the ground or be
2. The re-leveling short circuited with other signal
running time of the cables.
Elevator elevator is too long.
Err30 position 3. Check whether the distance 4A
abnormal 3. The up/down limit between two floors is too large,
switch acts during the causing too long re-leveling running
re-leveling process. time.
4. The steel rope slips 4. Check whether F9-02 is set
or locked-rotor occurs properly (greater than the whole
on the motor. normal-speed running time).
5. Check whether signal loss exists
in the encoder circuits.
- 220 -
Fault
Code
1. Check whether the encoder is
used properly.
1. The detected running 2. Check the setting of motor
speed exceeds the nameplate parameters. Perform
upper protection limit. motor auto-tuning again.
2. The speed exceeds 3. Check whether the inspection
the limit during self- signal acts at normal speed
Elevator speed running.
Err33 sliding. 5A
abnormal
3. The speed exceeds 4. Check the inspection switch and
the limit or re-leveling signal cables.
is not performed within 5. Check whether the emergency
the required time during power capacity meets the
emergency running. requirements.
6. Check whether the emergency
running speed is set properly.
Logic of the MCB is
Err34 Logic fault Contact the agent or Monarch. 4C
abnormal
1. If Err35 is reported when the
RUN contactor is not closed, check:
1. The elevator is not at
the bottom floor when •• Whether the next slow-down
shaft auto-tuning is switch is valid
started. •• Whether F4-01 (Current floor) is
2. No leveling signal set to 1
is received within 45s •• Whether the inspection switch is
continuous running. in inspection state and supports
3. The distance inspection running
between two floors is •• Whether F0-00 is set to 1
too small. 2. If Err35 is reported at the first
Shaft auto- 4. The maximum leveling position, check:
Err35 tuning data number of landing •• Whether the value of F4-03 4C
abnormal floors is inconsistent increases in UP direction and
with the setting value. decreases in DOWN direction.
5. The floor pulses If not, exchange the MCBs PGA
change inversely. and PGB.
6. The system is not •• Whether the NO/NC setting
in the inspection state of the leveling sensor is set
when shaft auto-tuning correctly
is performed. •• Whether the leveling plates are
7. Shaft auto-tuning inserted properly if the leveling
is not performed upon sensor signal blinks
power-on.
(To be continued)
- 221 -
Fault
Code
3. If Err35 is reported during
running, check:
•• Whether the running times out:
1. The elevator is not at No leveling signal is received
the bottom floor when when the running time exceeds
shaft auto-tuning is F9-02
started. •• Whether the super short floor
2. No leveling signal function is enabled when the
is received within 45s floor distance is less than 50 cm
continuous running. •• Whether the setting of F6-00
3. The distance (Top floor of the elevator) is
between two floors is smaller than the actual condition
too small. 4: If Err35 is reported when the
Shaft auto- 4. The maximum elevator arrives at the top floor,
Err35 tuning data number of landing check: 4C
abnormal floors is inconsistent •• Whether the obtained top floor of
with the setting value. the elevator and bottom floor of
5. The floor pulses the elevator are consistent with
change inversely. the setting of F6-00 and F6-01
when the up slow-down signal is
6. The system is not
valid and the elevator reaches
in the inspection state
the door zone
when shaft auto-tuning
is performed. •• Whether the obtained floor
distance is less than 50 cm
7. Shaft auto-tuning
is not performed upon 5. If Err35 is reported at power-on,
power-on. check whether the detected flag
length is 0.
(End)
1. The feedback of
the RUN contactor
is effective at startup
of the elevator, but 1. Check whether the feedback
the contactor has no contact of the contactor acts
output. properly.
2. The controller 2. Check the signal feature (NO,
RUN contactor NC) of the feedback contact.
outputs the RUN signal
Err36 feedback 5A
but receives no RUN 3. Check whether the output
abnormal
feedback during the cables UVW of the controller are
startup. connected properly.
3. When both feedback 4. Check whether the control circuit
signals of the RUN of the RUN contactor coil is normal.
contactor are enabled,
their states are
inconsistent.
- 222 -
Fault
Code
1. The output of the
brake contactor is 1. Check whether the brake coil
inconsistent with the and feedback contact are correct.
Brake feedback. 2. Check the signal feature (NO,
contactor
Err37 2. When both feedback NC) of the feedback contact. 5A
feedback
abnormal signals of the brake 3. Check whether the control
contactor are enabled, circuit of the brake contactor coil is
their states are normal.
inconsistent.
1. There is no input 1. Check whether the encoder is
of the encoder pulses used correctly.
when the elevator runs
2. Exchange phases A and B of the
automatically.
encoder.
2. The direction of the
3. Check the setting of F0-00, and
Encoder signal input encoder signal
Err38 change it to CLVC. 5A
abnormal is incorrect when
the elevator runs 4. Check whether the system and
automatically. signal cables are grounded reliably.
3. F0-00 is set to 0 5. Check whether cabling between
(SFVC) in distance the encoder and the PG card is
control. correct.
1. Check whether the thermal
protection relay is normal.
The motor overheat
2. Check whether the motor is used
Err39 Motor overheat relay input remains 3A
properly and whether it is damaged.
valid for a certain time.
3. Improve cooling conditions of the
motor.
Elevator The set elevator

The elevator is used for a long time
Err40 running running time is 4B
and needs maintenance.
timeout reached.
1. Check the safety circuit switches

and their states.
power supply is normal.
Safety circuit The safety circuit signal
Err41 3. Check whether the safety circuit 5A
breaking off is cut off.
contactor acts properly.
4. Confirm the signal feature (NO,
NC) of the feedback contact of the
safety circuit contactor.
- 223 -
Fault
Code
1. Check whether the hall door lock

and the car door lock are in good
contact.
The door lock circuit 2. Check whether the door lock
Door lock contactor acts properly.
feedback is invalid
Err42 breaking off 5A
during the elevator 3. Check the signal feature (NO,
during running
running. NC) of the feedback contact on the
door lock contactor.
power supply is normal.
1. Check the signal feature (NO,

NC) of the up limit switch.
2. Check whether the up limit
The up limit switch acts switch is in good contact.
Up limit signal
Err43 when the elevator is 3. Check whether the limit switch 4C
abnormal
running upward. is installed at a relatively low
position and acts even when the
elevator arrives at the terminal floor
normally.
NC) of the down limit switch.
2. Check whether the down limit
Down limit The down limit switch switch is in good contact.
Err44 signal acts when the elevator 3. Check whether the limit switch is 4C
abnormal is running downward. installed at a relatively high position
and thus acts even when the
elevator arrives at the terminal floor
normally.
1. Check whether the up slow-down

1 and the down slow-down 1 are in
1. The slow-down good contact.
signal is abnormal. 2. Check the signal feature (NO,
Slow-down
2. The obtained slow- NC) of the up slow-down 1 and the
Err45 switch position 4B
down distance is down slow-down 1.
abnormal
incorrect during shaft 3. Ensure that the obtained slow-
auto-tuning. down distance satisfies the slow-
down requirement at the elevator
speed.
- 224 -
Fault
Code
1. The re-leveling
running speed exceeds 1. Check the original and secondary
0.1 m/s. wiring of the shorting door lock
2. The elevator is out of circuit relay.
the door zone when re- 2. Check whether the shorting door
Re-leveling
Err46 leveling. lock circuit contactor feedback 2B
abnormal
3. The feedback of function is enabled and whether the
the shorting door feedback signal is normal.
lock circuit contactor 3. Check whether the encoder is
is abnormal during used properly.
running.
1. The feedback of
the shorting door lock
circuit contactor is
abnormal when the
door pre-open and re-
leveling function is
NC) of the feedback contact on the
enabled.
Shorting door shorting door lock circuit contactor.
2. The output of the
lock circuit 2. Check whether the shorting door
Err47 shorting door lock 2B
contactor lock circuit contactor acts properly.
circuit contactor times
abnormal 3. Check whether the elevator
out.
running speed at door pre-open or
3. The elevator speed
re-leveling is set properly.
exceeds the limit during
running in the condition
that the shorting door
lock circuit function is
enabled.
1. Check whether the door machine
The consecutive times system works properly.
that the door does
2. Check whether the CTB is
Err48 Door open fault not open to the limit 5A
normal.
reaches the setting in
Fb-13. 3. Check whether the door open
limit signal is normal.
The consecutive times 1. Check whether the door machine
that the door does system works properly.
Door close not open to the limit 2. Check whether the CTB is
Err49 reaches the setting in 5A
fault normal.
Fb-13.
3. Check whether the door lock
acts properly.
- 225 -
Fault
Code
1. Check the communication cable
connection.
2. Check the power supply of the
Feedback data CTB.
CAN
of CANbus
Err51 communication 1A
communication with the 3. Check whether the 24 V power
abnormal
CTB remains incorrect. supply of the controller is normal.
4. Check whether strong-power
interference on communication
exists.
1. Check the communication cable
connection.
2. Check whether the 24 V power
Feedback data supply of the controller is normal.
HCB
of Modbus
Err52 communication 1A
communication with the 3. Check whether the HCB
abnormal
HCB remains incorrect. addresses are repeated.
4. Check whether strong-power
interference on communication
exists.
1. Check whether the door lock
circuit is normal.
2. Check whether the feedback
contact of the door lock contactor
acts properly.
In the automatic 3. Check whether the system
running state, the receives the door open limit signal
Err53 Door lock fault 5A
relevant door lock when the door lock signal is valid.
signal is abnormal.
4. Check whether when the hall
door lock signal and the car door
lock signal are detected separately,
the detected states of the hall
door locks and car door lock are
inconsistent.
During automatic
running of the elevator,
Stop at another Check the door open limit signal at
Err55 the door open limit is 1A
landing floor the present floor.
not achieved at the
present floor.
Serial
peripheral The SPI 1. Check the wiring between the
Err57 interface (SPI) communication is control board and the drive board. 5A
communication abnormal. 2. Contact the agent or Monarch.
abnormal
- 226 -
Fault
Code
1. The up limit and 1. Check whether the states (NO,
down limit switches are NC) of the slow-down switches and
Shaft position valid simultaneously. limit switches are consistent with
Err58 switches 2. The up slow-down the parameter setting of the MCB 4B
abnormal and down slow-down 2. Check whether malfunction of
switches are valid the slow-down switches and limit
simultaneously. switches exists.
Note
•• Fault Err41 is not recorded in the elevator stop state.

•• Fault Err42 is reset automatically when the door lock circuit is shorted or 1s after the fault
occurs in the door zone.
•• If faults Err51 and Err52 persist, they are recorded once every one hour.
- 227 -
Warranty Agreement
1. The warranty period of the product is 18 months (refer to the barcode on the
equipment). During the warranty period, if the product fails or is damaged under the
condition of normal use by following the instructions, Monarch will be responsible for
free maintenance.
2. Within the warranty period, maintenance will be charged for the damages caused by the
following reasons:
a. Improper use or repair/modification without prior permission
b. Fire, flood, abnormal voltage, other disasters and secondary disaster
c. Hardware damage caused by dropping or transportation after procurement
d. Improper operation
e. Damage out of the equipment (for example, external device)
3. If there is any failure or damage to the product, please correctly fill out the Product
Warranty Card in detail.
4. The maintenance fee is charged according to the latest Maintenance Price List of
Monarch.
5. The Product Warranty Card is not re-issued. Please keep the card and present it to the
maintenance personnel when asking for maintenance.
6. If there is any problem during the service, contact Monarch's agent or Monarch directly.
7. This agreement shall be interpreted by Suzhou MONARCH Control Technology Co., Ltd.
Service Department, Suzhou MONARCH Control Technology Co., Ltd.

Address: 16, Youciang Rd, Wangshan Industrial Park, Wuzhong Economic Development
Zone, Suzhou, China P.C.: 215104
Website: http://www.szmctc.cn
Product Warranty Card
Add. of unit:
Customer
information
Name of unit: Contact person:
P.C.:
Tel.:
Product model:
Product
information Body barcode (Attach here):
Name of agent:
(Maintenance time and content):
Failure
information
Maintenance personnel:

New Monarch Nice 3000 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

New Monarch Nice 3000 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

New Monarch Nice 3000 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the main features of the NICE3000 new controller?

What are the main features of the NICE3000 new controller?

What are some differences between the NICE3000 and NICE3000 new controllers?

What are some differences between the NICE3000 and NICE3000 new controllers?

NICE3000new User Manual Preface

Thank you for purchasing the NICE3000new integrated elevator controller.

1. Comparison with the NICE3000

Item NICE3000 NICE3000new

LCD operator Not support Support

2. Connection to peripheral devices

Three-phase AC Use within the allowable

Select a proper breaker

Suppress the high order

RUN LOCAL/REMOT FED/REV TUNE/TC

Noise filter on integrated elevator QUICK

3. Function list of the NICE3000new

Common Running Functions

Considering inaccurate running control at high inspection speed but

The system automatically determines the fault level. If the safety

Function Description Remark

After landing at a floor, the elevator may move

Chapter 2 Product Information........................................................................... 22

Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation................................................ 34

Chapter 4 Use of the NICE3000new..................................................................... 66

Chapter 5 System Commissioning and Application Example............................. 78

Chapter 7 Description of Function Codes........................................................ 136

Chapter 8 EMC................................................................................................. 204

Chapter 9 Troubleshooting............................................................................... 214

Chapter 1 Safety Information and Precautions

In addition, NOTE appearing in other chapters indicates that an unintended result or

1.1 Safety Precautions

1.2 General Precautions

3. Motor heat and noise

8. Altitude and de-rating

1.3 Protective Functions

Chapter 2 Product Information

2.1 System Configuration of the NICE3000new

NICE3000new integrated controller

LED operation panel Synchronous or

Load cell MCTC-HCB MCTC-CCB

The following figure shows the system structure of the NICE3000new.

2.2 Designation Rules and Model Description

Mark Motor Type 30 30 kW

Controller model MODEL: NICE-L-C-4015

Suzhou MONARCH Control Technology Co.Ltd

2.3 Models and Specifications

Power Input Current Output Current Motor Power

1. In terms of single-phase and three-phase 220 VAC, NICE-L-A/B-2002 and NICE-L-A/B-2003

2.4 Technical Specifications

2.5 Physical Appearance and Mounting Dimensions

Figure 2-5 Mounting dimensions of the NICE3000new

Table 2-3 Mounting dimensions of the NICE3000new

2.6 Optional Parts

Name Model Function Remark

2.7 Selection of Braking Resistor

Power of Max. Min. Power of

NICE-L-C-2002 1.1 145.0 125.0 300

Power of Max. Min. Power of

Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation